5 - Johnson Controls | Product Information

5 - Johnson Controls | Product Information
AIR-COOLED SCROLL CHILLER
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE
Supersedes 150.72-NM3 (909)
Form 150.72-NM3 (811)
035-21911-001
YLAA0195 - YLAA0515
AIR-COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS
WITH MICROCHANNEL CONDENSER COILS
STYLE A (50 HZ)
57 - 142 TON
R-410A
Issue Date:
August 15, 2011
Products are produced at a
facility whose qualitymanagement systems are
ISO9001 certified.
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

IMPORTANT!
READ BEFORE PROCEEDING!
GENERAL SAFETY GUIDELINES
This equipment is a relatively complicated apparatus.
During installation, operation, maintenance or service,
individuals may be exposed to certain components or
conditions including, but not limited to: refrigerants,
oils, materials under pressure, rotating components,
and both high and low voltage. Each of these items
has the potential, if misused or handled improperly, to
cause bodily injury or death. It is the obligation and
responsibility of operating/service personnel to identify
and recognize these inherent hazards, protect themselves,
and proceed safely in completing their tasks. Failure to
comply with any of these requirements could result in
serious damage to the equipment and the property in
which it is situated, as well as severe personal injury or
death to themselves and people at the site.
This document is intended for use by owner-authorized
operating/service personnel. It is expected that this
individual possesses independent training that will
enable them to perform their assigned tasks properly
and safely. It is essential that, prior to performing any
task on this equipment, this individual shall have read
and understood this document and any referenced
materials. This individual shall also be familiar with and
comply with all applicable governmental standards and
regulations pertaining to the task in question.
SAFETY SYMBOLS
The following symbols are used in this document to alert the reader to areas of potential hazard:
DANGER indicates an imminently
hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
CAUTION identifies a hazard which
could lead to damage to the machine,
damage to other equipment and/or
environmental pollution. Usually an
instruction will be given, together with
a brief explanation.
WARNING indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
NOTE is used to highlight additional
information which may be helpful to
you.
External wiring, unless specified as an optional connection in the manufacturer’s product
line, is NOT to be connected inside the micropanel cabinet. Devices such as relays, switches,
transducers and controls may NOT be installed inside the panel. NO external wiring is allowed to be run through the micropanel. All wiring must be in accordance with Johnson
Controls published specifications and must be performed ONLY by qualified Johnson Controls
personnel. Johnson Controls will not be responsible for damages/problems resulting from
improper connections to the controls or application of improper control signals. Failure to
follow this will void the manufacturer’s warranty and cause serious damage to property or
injury to persons.
2
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

CHANGEABILITY OF THIS DOCUMENT
In complying with Johnson Controls policy for
continuous product improvement, the information
contained in this document is subject to change without
notice. While Johnson Controls makes no commitment
to update or provide current information automatically
to the manual owner, that information, if applicable, can
be obtained by contacting the nearest Johnson Controls
Service office.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
It is the responsibility of operating/service personnel
to verify the applicability of these documents to the
equipment in question. If there is any question in
the mind of operating/service personnel as to the
applicability of these documents, then prior to working
on the equipment, they should verify with the owner
whether the equipment has been modified and if current
literature is available.
3
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION & SAFETY.......................................................................13
INTRODUCTION..........................................................................................................................................13
WARRANTY.................................................................................................................................................13
SAFETY AND QUALITY..............................................................................................................................13
Standards for Safety and Quality........................................................................................................13
Responsibility for Safety.....................................................................................................................14
ABOUT THIS MANUAL...............................................................................................................................14
MISUSE OF EQUIPMENT............................................................................................................................14
Suitability for Application....................................................................................................................14
Structural Support................................................................................................................................14
Mechanical Strength ...........................................................................................................................14
General Access.....................................................................................................................................14
Pressure Systems................................................................................................................................15
Electrical................................................................................................................................................15
Rotating Parts.......................................................................................................................................15
Sharp Edges..........................................................................................................................................15
Refrigerants and Oils...........................................................................................................................15
High Temperature and Pressure Cleaning.........................................................................................15
Emergency Shutdown..........................................................................................................................15
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................17
INTRODUCTION..........................................................................................................................................17
GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION...........................................................................................................17
Compressors........................................................................................................................................17
Cooler (Evaporator)..............................................................................................................................17
Condenser.............................................................................................................................................18
HIGH AMBIENT KIT.....................................................................................................................................19
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE.......................................................................................19
POWER PANEL............................................................................................................................................19
ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS..................................................................................................................20
Power Options......................................................................................................................................20
Control Options....................................................................................................................................20
Compressor, Piping, Evaporator Options..........................................................................................20
Condenser and Cabinet Options.........................................................................................................21
UNIT COMPONENTS ..................................................................................................................................23
CONTROL / POWER PANEL COMPONENTS ...........................................................................................25
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN).............................................................................................27
BASIC UNIT NOMENCLATURE..................................................................................................................27
PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM......................................................................................34
SECTION 3 – HANDLING AND STORAGE.......................................................................................................35
DELIVERY AND STORAGE.........................................................................................................................35
INSPECTION................................................................................................................................................35
MOVING THE CHILLER...............................................................................................................................35
4
Lifting Weights......................................................................................................................................35
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................37
INSTALLATION CHECKLIST.......................................................................................................................37
HANDLING...................................................................................................................................................37
INSPECTION................................................................................................................................................37
LOCATION AND CLEARANCES.................................................................................................................37
Foundation............................................................................................................................................38
Ground Level Locations......................................................................................................................38
Rooftop Locations................................................................................................................................38
Noise Sensitive Locations...................................................................................................................38
SPRING ISOLATORS (OPTIONAL).............................................................................................................38
COMPRESSOR MOUNTING.......................................................................................................................38
REMOTE COOLER OPTION.......................................................................................................................38
CHILLED LIQUID PIPING............................................................................................................................38
PIPEWORK ARRANGEMENT.....................................................................................................................39
DUCT WORK CONNECTION .....................................................................................................................40
General Requirements ........................................................................................................................40
WIRING.........................................................................................................................................................40
Evaporator Pump Start Contacts........................................................................................................40
System Run Contacts..........................................................................................................................40
Alarm Status Contacts.........................................................................................................................41
Remote Start/Stop Contacts................................................................................................................41
Remote Emergency Cutoff..................................................................................................................41
Remote Temp Reset Input...................................................................................................................41
Load Limit Input....................................................................................................................................41
Flow Switch Input.................................................................................................................................41
COMPRESSOR HEATERS..........................................................................................................................41
RELIEF VALVES..........................................................................................................................................41
HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT........................................................................................................................41
SINGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION – TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED DISCONNECT
SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER...............................................................................................................42
USER CONTROL WIRING INPUTS.............................................................................................................43
USER CONTROL WIRING OUTPUTS.........................................................................................................44
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA......................................................................................................................45
OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS (ENGLISH).................................................................................................45
Temperatures and Flows.....................................................................................................................45
Voltage Limitations...............................................................................................................................45
HEAT EXCHANGER FLOW, GPM...............................................................................................................46
Ethylene & Propylene Glycol Correction Factors.............................................................................46
PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH)......................................................................................................................47
Standard Efficiency YLAA0285 - YLAA0485......................................................................................47
High Efficiency YLAA0195 - YLAA0515..............................................................................................48
JOHNSON CONTROLS
5
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)
ELECTRICAL INFORMATION.....................................................................................................................49
Electrical Notes.....................................................................................................................................50
Electrical Data.......................................................................................................................................51
Wiring Lugs...........................................................................................................................................52
ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND.........................................................................................................53
WIRING DIAGRAMS....................................................................................................................................56
Elementary Wiring Diagrams - YLAA0195..........................................................................................56
Connection Wiring Diagrams - YLAA0195.........................................................................................74
Elementary Wiring Diagrams - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515.....................................................................88
Connection Diagrams - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515................................................................................96
DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH).......................................................................................................................... 111
TECHNICAL DATA – CLEARANCES........................................................................................................120
WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR MOUNTING POSITIONS......................................................121
ISOLOATOR DATA.....................................................................................................................................124
One Inch Deflection Spring Isolator Cross-reference.....................................................................124
One Inch Deflection Spring Isolators Installation Instructions......................................................125
Seismic Isolator Cross-reference.....................................................................................................126
Seismic Isolator Installation and Adjustment INSTRUCTIONS......................................................127
Duralene Isolator Cross-reference....................................................................................................128
Installation of Durulene Vibration Isolators INSTRUCTIONS.........................................................129
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING......................................................................................................................131
COMMISSIONING......................................................................................................................................131
PREPARATION – POWER OFF.................................................................................................................131
Inspection ...........................................................................................................................................131
Refrigerant Charge.............................................................................................................................131
Service and Oil Line Valves...............................................................................................................131
Compressor Oil...................................................................................................................................131
Fans ....................................................................................................................................................131
Isolation / Protection..........................................................................................................................131
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................131
Power Connections............................................................................................................................131
Grounding...........................................................................................................................................131
Supply Voltage....................................................................................................................................132
PREPARATION – POWER ON..................................................................................................................132
Switch Settings...................................................................................................................................132
Compressor Heaters..........................................................................................................................132
Water System......................................................................................................................................132
Flow Switch.........................................................................................................................................132
Temperature Sensor(s)......................................................................................................................132
EQUIPMENT PRE-STARTUP & STARTUP CHECKLIST..........................................................................133
PRE-STARTUP....................................................................................................................................133
STARTUP.............................................................................................................................................133
SETPOINTS ENTRY LIST..........................................................................................................................134
6
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)
CHECKING SUPERHEAT AND SUBCOOLING........................................................................................135
LEAK CHECKING......................................................................................................................................135
UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE................................................................................................................136
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS......................................................................................................................137
INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................137
IPU II and I/O Boards..........................................................................................................................137
Display.................................................................................................................................................138
Keypad.................................................................................................................................................138
Battery Back-up..................................................................................................................................138
Transformer ........................................................................................................................................138
Programming # of Compressors.......................................................................................................138
“STATUS” KEY..........................................................................................................................................139
Unit Status...........................................................................................................................................139
General Status Messages..................................................................................................................139
Fault Safety Status Messages...........................................................................................................141
Status Key Messages.........................................................................................................................144
DISPLAY/PRINT KEYS..............................................................................................................................145
Oper Data Key.....................................................................................................................................145
Oper Data Quick Reference List........................................................................................................148
Print Key..............................................................................................................................................149
Operating Data Printout.....................................................................................................................149
History Printout..................................................................................................................................150
History Displays.................................................................................................................................150
Software Version................................................................................................................................152
“ENTRY” KEYS..........................................................................................................................................153
Up and Down Arrow Keys..................................................................................................................153
Enter/ADV Key....................................................................................................................................153
“SETPOINTS” KEYS.................................................................................................................................154
Cooling Setpoints...............................................................................................................................154
Leaving Chilled Liquid Control.........................................................................................................154
Return Chilled Liquid Control...........................................................................................................155
Remote Setpoints Control.................................................................................................................155
SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY KEY.............................................................................................................155
PROGRAM KEY.........................................................................................................................................157
System Trip Volts................................................................................................................................158
Unit Trip Volts.....................................................................................................................................159
PROGRAM KEY LIMITS AND DEFAULT..................................................................................................159
SETPOINTS QUICK REFERENCE LIST...................................................................................................160
“UNIT” KEYS ............................................................................................................................................161
Options Key........................................................................................................................................161
CLOCK.......................................................................................................................................................165
UNIT KEYS OPTIONS PROGRAMMING QUICK REFERENCE LIST......................................................166
JOHNSON CONTROLS
7
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION.....................................................................................................................167
CAPACITY CONTROL...............................................................................................................................167
SUCTION PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS...............................................................................................167
DISCHARGE PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS..........................................................................................167
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL....................................................................................................167
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/LAG AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING......................168
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROLOVERRIDE TO REDUCE CYCLING..........................................168
RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL.....................................................................................................169
RETURN CHILLLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/LAG AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING.....................170
ANTI-RECYCLE TIMER.............................................................................................................................171
ANTI-COINCIDENCE TIMER.....................................................................................................................171
EVAPORATOR PUMP CONTROL & YORK..............................................................................................171
HYDRO KIT PUMP CONTROL..................................................................................................................171
EVAPORATOR HEATER CONTROL.........................................................................................................171
PUMPDOWN CONTROL...........................................................................................................................171
STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL.............................................................................................171
LOAD LIMITING.........................................................................................................................................175
COMPRESSOR RUN STATUS..................................................................................................................175
ALARM STATUS........................................................................................................................................175
BAS/EMS TEMPERATURE RESET USINGA VOLTAGE OR CURRENT SIGNAL..................................176
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................................177
CLEARING HISTORY BUFFERS..............................................................................................................177
SERVICE MODE........................................................................................................................................177
SERVICE MODE – OUTPUTS...................................................................................................................177
SERVICE MODE – CHILLER CONFIGURATION......................................................................................178
SERVICE MODE – ANALOG & DIGITAL INPUTS....................................................................................178
CONTROL INPUTS/OUTPUTS..................................................................................................................179
MICROBOARD LAYOUT...........................................................................................................................180
CHECKING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS........................................................................................................181
Digital Inputs.......................................................................................................................................181
Analog Inputs – Temperature............................................................................................................181
Outside Air Sensor.............................................................................................................................181
Liquid & Refrigerant Sensor Test Points .........................................................................................182
Analog Inputs – Pressure..................................................................................................................183
Digital Outputs....................................................................................................................................184
OPTIONAL PRINTER INSTALLATION......................................................................................................185
Parts.....................................................................................................................................................185
Assembly and Wiring.........................................................................................................................185
Obtaining a Printout...........................................................................................................................185
TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................................................186
8
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................................................189
IMPORTANT...............................................................................................................................................189
COMPRESSORS........................................................................................................................................189
Oil Level check...................................................................................................................................189
Oil Analysis.........................................................................................................................................189
CONDENSER FAN MOTORS....................................................................................................................189
CONDENSER COILS.................................................................................................................................189
OPERATING PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................................189
ON-BOARD BATTERY BACK-UP.............................................................................................................189
PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGER (EVAPORATOR) HEATER....................................................189
OVERALL UNIT INSPECTION..................................................................................................................189
MICROCHANNEL COIL CLEANING.........................................................................................................190
BACNET, MODBUS AND YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS.................................................................191
BACnet and Modbus Communications............................................................................................194
Communications Data Map Notes:...................................................................................................194
YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS...........................................................................................................198
Received Data (Control Data)............................................................................................................198
Transmitted Data................................................................................................................................198
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION CHART..................................................................................................202
R410APRESSURE TEMPERATURE CHART...........................................................................................203
JOHNSON CONTROLS
9
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

LIST OF FIGURES
FIG. 1 – UNIT COMPONENTS FRONT.....................................................................................................23
FIG. 2 – UNIT COMPONENTS SIDE.........................................................................................................24
FIG. 3 – POWER PANEL COMPONENTS.................................................................................................25
FIG. 4 – POWER PANEL / CONTROL COMPONENTS............................................................................26
FIG. 5 – REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM..............................................................................................33
FIG. 6 – PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM......................................................................34
FIG. 7 – UNIT RIGGING/LIFTING .............................................................................................................36
FIG. 8 – CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM.........................................................................................................39
FIG. 9 – S
INGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION – TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED
DISCONNECT SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER......................................................................42
FIG. 10 – CONTROL WIRING INPUTS........................................................................................................43
FIG. 11 – CONTROL WIRING OUTPUTS....................................................................................................44
FIG. 12 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 1..............................................................56
FIG. 13 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 2..............................................................58
FIG. 14 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 3..............................................................60
FIG. 15 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 4..............................................................62
FIG. 16 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 5..............................................................64
FIG. 17 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 6..............................................................66
FIG. 18 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 7..............................................................68
FIG. 19 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 8..............................................................70
FIG. 20 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 9..............................................................72
FIG. 21 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 1..............................................................74
FIG. 22 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 2..............................................................76
FIG. 23 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 3..............................................................78
FIG. 24 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 4..............................................................80
FIG. 25 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 5..............................................................82
FIG. 26 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 6..............................................................84
FIG. 27 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 7..............................................................86
FIG. 28 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 1........................................88
FIG. 29 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 2........................................90
FIG. 30 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 3........................................92
FIG. 31 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 4........................................94
FIG. 32 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 1.......................................................96
FIG. 33 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 2.......................................................98
FIG. 34 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 3.....................................................100
FIG. 35 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 6.....................................................102
FIG. 36 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 7.....................................................104
FIG. 37 – WIRING DIAGRAM, SINGLE POINT WIRING OPTIONS.........................................................106
FIG. 38 – DUAL PUMP WIRING................................................................................................................107
FIG. 39 – WIRING.......................................................................................................................................108
FIG. 40 – LAYOUT - POWER BLOCKS AND TRANSFORMERS............................................................. 110
FIG. 41 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0195HE.................................................................................. 111
FIG. 42 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0220HE, 0260HE, 0285SE, & 320SE.................................... 112
10
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

LIST OF FIGURES (CONT.)
FIG. 43 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0300HE,YLAA0360SE, YLAA0400SE.................................. 113
FIG. 44 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0435SE (ENGLISH)............................................................... 114
FIG. 45 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0350HE (ENGLISH)............................................................... 115
FIG. 46 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0390HE, YLAA0485SE.......................................................... 116
FIG. 47 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0440HE.................................................................................. 117
FIG. 48 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0455HE.................................................................................. 118
FIG. 49 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0515HE.................................................................................. 119
FIG. 50 – UNIT CLEARANCES – ALL MODELS......................................................................................120
FIG. 51 – WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR MOUNTING POSITIONS......................................121
FIG. 52 – ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE...................................124
FIG. 53 – ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATORS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS...............125
FIG. 54 – SEISMIC ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE.............................................................................126
FIG. 55 – SEISMIC ISOLATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS.........................127
FIG. 56 – DURALENE ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE........................................................................128
FIG. 57 – INSTALLATION OF DURULENE VIBRATION ISOLATORS INSTRUCTIONS.........................129
FIG. 58 – L
EAVING WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL EXAMPLE.....................................................168
FIG. 59 – SETPOINT ADJUST...................................................................................................................168
FIG. 60 – CONDENSER FAN LOCATIONS WIRING DIAGRAMS............................................................172
FIG. 61 – MICROBOARD LAYOUT...........................................................................................................180
FIG. 62 – I/O BOARD RELAY CONTACT ARCHITECTURE.....................................................................184
FIG. 63 – PRINTER TO MICROBOARD ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS.................................................185
FIG. 64 – MICROPANEL CONNECTIONS.................................................................................................192
JOHNSON CONTROLS
11
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011

LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 – TEMPERATURES AND FLOWS.............................................................................................45
TABLE 2 – VOLTAGE LIMITATIONS.........................................................................................................45
TABLE 3 – ETHYLENE & PROPYLENE GLYCOL CORRECTION FACTORS........................................46
TABLE 4 – PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH).................................................................................................47
TABLE 4A – PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH).................................................................................................48
TABLE 5 – MICROPANEL POWER SUPPLY............................................................................................49
TABLE 6 – VOLTAGE RANGE..................................................................................................................49
TABLE 7 – SETPOINTS ENTRY LIST.....................................................................................................134
TABLE 8 – STATUS KEY MESSAGES QUICK REFERENCE LIST.......................................................144
TABLE 9 – OPERATION DATA................................................................................................................148
TABLE 10 – COOLING SETPOINTS, PROGRAMMABLE LIMITS AND DEFAULTS..............................156
TABLE 11 – PROGRAM KEY LIMITS AND DEFAULT..............................................................................159
TABLE 12 – SETPOINTS QUICK REFERENCE LIST..............................................................................160
TABLE 13 – UNIT KEYS OPTIONS PROGRAMMING QUICK REFERENCE LIST.................................166
TABLE 14 – SAMPLE COMPRESSOR STAGING FOR RETURN WATER CONTROL...........................169
TABLE 15 – RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS).....................170
TABLE 16 – RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS).....................170
TABLE 17 – YLAA STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL USING DISCHARGE PRESSURE
ONLY (2, 3, OR 4 FANS PER SYSTEM)...............................................................................173
TABLE 18 – YLAA STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL USING DISCHARGE PRESSURE
ONLY (5 OR 6 FANS PER SYSTEM)....................................................................................174
TABLE 19 – COMPRESSOR OPERATION – LOAD LIMITING................................................................175
TABLE 20 – I/O DIGITAL INPUTS.............................................................................................................179
TABLE 21 – I/O DIGITAL OUTPUTS.........................................................................................................179
TABLE 22 – I/O ANALOG INPUTS............................................................................................................179
TABLE 23 – I/O ANALOG OUTPUTS........................................................................................................179
TABLE 24 – OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR......................................................................................................181
TABLE 25 – ENTERING/LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMP. SENSOR,
TEMPERATURE/VOLTAGE CORRELATION........................................................................182
TABLE 26 – PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS...............................................................................................183
TABLE 27 – TROUBLESHOOTING...........................................................................................................186
TABLE 28 – MINIMUM, MAXIMUM AND DEFAULT VALUES..................................................................192
TABLE 29 – VALUES REQUIRED FOR BAS COMMUNICATION............................................................193
TABLE 30 – REAL TIME ERROR NUMBERS...........................................................................................193
TABLE 31 - BACNET AND MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP..................................................195
TABLE 32 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP....................................................................199
12
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION AND SAFETY
INTRODUCTION
YORK YLAA0195 - 0515 (57 -142 ton, 200 - 500kW)
chillers are manufactured to the highest design and
construction standards to ensure high performance,
reliability and adaptability to all types of air conditioning
installations.
The unit is intended for cooling water or glycol solutions
and is not suitable for purposes other than those specified
in this manual.
This manual contains all the information required for
correct installation and commissioning of the unit,
together with operating and maintenance instructions.
The manual should be read thoroughly before attempting
to operate or service the unit. All procedures detailed in
the manuals, including installation, commissioning and
maintenance tasks must only be performed by suitably
trained and qualified personnel.
The manufacturer will not be liable for any injury or
damage caused by incorrect installation, commissioning,
operation or maintenance resulting from a failure to
follow the procedures and instructions detailed in the
manuals.
WARRANTY
Johnson Controls warrants all equipment and materials
against defects in workmanship and materials for a
period of eighteen months from date of shipment, or
12 months from date of start-up, whichever occurs first,
unless labor or extended warranty has been purchased
as part of the contract.
The warranty is limited to parts only replacement and
shipping of any faulty part, or sub-assembly, which has
failed due to poor quality or manufacturing errors. All
claims must be supported by evidence that the failure
has occurred within the warranty period, and that the
unit has been operated within the designed parameters
specified.
All warranty claims must specify the unit model, serial
number, order number and run hours/starts. Model
and serial number information is printed on the unit
identification plate.
For warranty purposes, the following conditions must
be satisfied:
• The initial start of the unit must be carried out by
trained personnel from an Authorized Johnson
Controls Service Center (see “Commissioning”
section of this IOM).
• Only genuine YORK approved spare parts, oils,
coolants, and refrigerants must be used.
• All the scheduled maintenance operations detailed
in this manual must be performed at the specified
times by suitably trained and qualified personnel
(see “Maintenance Section” of this IOM.
• Failure to satisfy any of these conditions will
automatically void the warranty.
SAFETY AND QUALITY
Standards for Safety and Quality
YLAA chillers are designed and built within an ISO
9002 accredited design and manufacturing organization.
The chillers comply with the applicable sections of the
following Standards and Codes:
• ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15- Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration.
• ANSI/NFPA Standard 70- National Electrical
Code (N.E.C.).
• ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code- Section
VIII Division 1.
• ARI Standard 550/590 - Positive Displacement
Compressors and Air Cooled Rotary Screw Water
Chilling Packages.
• ASHRAE 90.1- Energy Efficiency compliance.
• Conform to Intertek Testing Services, formerly
ETL, for construction of chillers and provide
ETL/cETL listing label.
• Manufactured in facility registered to ISO
9002.
• OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Act.
In addition, the chillers conform to Underwriters
Laboratories (U.L.) for construction of chillers and
provide U.L./cU.L. Listing Label.
The unit warranty will be void if any modification to the
unit is carried out without prior written approval from
Johnson Controls.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
13
1
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION and SAFETY
Responsibility for Safety
Every care has been taken in the design and manufacture
of the unit to ensure compliance with the safety
requirements listed above. However, the individual
operating or working on any machinery is primarily
responsible for:
• Personal safety, safety of other personnel, and the
machinery.
• Correct utilization of the machinery in accordance
with the procedures detailed in the manuals.
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
The following terms are used in this document to alert
the reader to areas of potential hazard.
A WARNING is given in this document to identify a
hazard, which could lead to personal injury. Usually
an instruction will be given, together with a brief
explanation and the possible result of ignoring the
instruction.
The contents of this manual include suggested best
working practices and procedures. These are issued for
guidance only, and they do not take precedence over
the above stated individual responsibility and/or local
safety regulations.
This manual and any other document supplied with the
unit are the property of Johnson Controls which reserves
all rights. They may not be reproduced, in whole or
in part, without prior written authorization from an
authorized Johnson Controls representative.
MISUSE OF EQUIPMENT
Suitability for Application
The unit is intended for cooling water or glycol solutions
and is not suitable for purposes other than those specified
in these instructions. Any use of the equipment other
than its intended use, or operation of the equipment
contrary to the relevant procedures may result in injury
to the operator or damage to the equipment.
The unit must not be operated outside the design
parameters specified in this manual.
Structural Support
Structural support of the unit must be provided as
indicated in these instructions. Failure to provide proper
support may result in injury to the operator or damage
to the equipment and/or building.
Mechanical Strength
A CAUTION identifies a hazard which could lead to
damage to the machine, damage to other equipment
and/or environmental pollution. Usually an instruction
will be given, together with a brief explanation and the
possible result of ignoring the instruction.
A NOTE is used to highlight additional information,
which may be helpful to you but where there are no
special safety implications.
14
The unit is not designed to withstand loads or stresses
from adjacent equipment, pipework or structures.
Additional components must not be mounted on the unit.
Any such extraneous loads may cause structural failure
and may result in injury to the operator or damage to
the equipment.
General Access
There are a number of areas and features, which may
be a hazard and potentially cause injury when working
on the unit unless suitable safety precautions are taken.
It is important to ensure access to the unit is restricted
to suitably qualified persons who are familiar with the
potential hazards and precautions necessary for safe
operation and maintenance of equipment containing
high temperatures, pressures and voltages.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION and SAFETY
Pressure Systems
Sharp Edges
The unit contains refrigerant vapor and liquid under
pressure, release of which can be a danger and cause
injury. The user should ensure that care is taken during
installation, operation and maintenance to avoid damage
to the pressure system. No attempt should be made
to gain access to the component parts of the pressure
system other than by suitably trained and qualified
personnel.
The fins on the air-cooled condenser coils have sharp
metal edges. Reasonable care should be taken when
working in contact with the coils to avoid the risk of
minor abrasions and lacerations. The use of gloves is
recommended.
Electrical
The unit must be grounded. No installation or
maintenance work should be attempted on the electrical
equipment without first switching power OFF, isolating
and locking-off the power supply. Servicing and
maintenance on live equipment must only be performed
by suitably trained and qualified personnel. No attempt
should be made to gain access to the control panel or
electrical enclosures during normal operation of the
unit.
Rotating Parts
Fan guards must be fitted at all times and not removed
unless the power supply has been isolated. If ductwork is
to be fitted, requiring the wire fan guards to be removed,
alternative safety measures must be taken to protect
against the risk of injury from rotating fans.
Frame rails, brakes, and other components may also have
sharp edges. Reasonable care should be taken when
working in contact with any components to avoid risk
of minor abrasions and lacerations.
Refrigerants and Oils
Refrigerants and oils used in the unit are generally
nontoxic, non-flammable and non-corrosive, and pose
no special safety hazards. Use of gloves and safety
glasses is, however, recommended when working on the
unit. The build up of refrigerant vapor, from a leak for
example, does pose a risk of asphyxiation in confined or
enclosed spaces and attention should be given to good
ventilation.
High Temperature and Pressure Cleaning
High temperature and pressure cleaning methods (e.g.
steam cleaning) should not be used on any part of the
pressure system as this may cause operation of the
pressure relief device(s). Detergents and solvents, which
may cause corrosion, should also be avoided.
Emergency Shutdown
In case of emergency, the control panel is fitted with
a Unit Switch to stop the unit in an emergency. When
operated, it removes the low voltage 120 VAC electrical
supply from the inverter system, thus shutting down
the unit.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
15
1
SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION and SAFETY
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
16
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2
INTRODUCTION
YORK YLAA Air-Cooled Scroll Chillers provide
chilled water for all air conditioning applications using
central station air handling or terminal units. They are
completely self-contained and are designed for outdoor
(roof or ground level) installation. Each complete
packaged unit includes hermetic scroll compressors,
a liquid cooler, air cooled condenser, a charge of Zero
Ozone Depletion Potential Refrigerant R-410A and
a weather resistant microprocessor control center, all
mounted on a pressed steel base.
GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The units are completely assembled with all
interconnecting refrigerant piping and internal wiring,
ready for field installation.
Cooler (Evaporator)
Prior to delivery, the packaged unit is pressure-tested,
evacuated, and fully charged with a zero ozone depletion
Refrigerant-R410A and oil. After assembly, a complete
operational test is performed with water flowing through
the cooler to assure that the refrigeration circuit operates
correctly.
The unit structure is heavy-gauge, galvanized steel. This
galvanized steel is coated with baked-on powder paint,
which, when subjected to ASTM B117 1000 hour, salt
spray testing, yields a minimum ASTM 1654 rating of
“6”. Units are designed in accordance with NFPA 70
(National Electric Code), ASHRAE/ANSI 15 Safety
code for mechanical refrigeration, ASME, and rated in
accordance with ARI Standard 550/590.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
Compressors
The chiller has suction-gas cooled, hermetic, scroll
compressors. The YLAA compressors incorporate
a compliant scroll design in both the axial and
radial direction. All rotating parts are statically and
dynamically balanced. A large internal volume and oil
reservoir provides greater liquid tolerance. Compressor
crankcase heaters are also included for extra protection
against liquid migration. The motor terminal boxes have
IP54 weather protection.
The cooler is a direct expansion type with refrigerant
inside high efficiency copper tubes. The liquid flowing
through the cooler is forced over the tubes by water
baffles.
The water baffles are constructed of brass to resist
corrosion. The removable heads allow access to the
internally enhanced seamless copper tubes. Vent and
drain connections are included.
Water inlet and outlet connections are grooved for
compatibility with field supplied ANSI/AWWA C-606
couplings.
The cooler is equipped with a heater controlled by
a separate thermostat. The heater provides freeze
protection for the cooler down to -29º C (-20º F) ambient.
The cooler is covered with ¾" flexible, closed cell, foam
insulation (K = 0.25).
17
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The evaporator is constructed, tested and stamped in
accordance with applicable sections of ASME pressure
vessel code for minimum 31.0 barg (450 psig) refrigerant
side design working pressure and 10.3 barg (150 psig)
water side design working pressure.
A strainer with a mesh size between .5 and 1.5 mm (40
mesh) is recommended upstream of the heat exchanger
to prevent clogging from water system debris.
Condenser
Coils – Condenser coils are Microchannel type and
made of a single material to avoid galvanic corrosion
due to dissimilar metals. Coils and headers are brazed as
one piece. Integral subcooling is included. The design
working pressure of the coil is 100 barg (1500 psig).
Fans – The condenser fans are composed of corrosion
resistant aluminum hub and glass-fiber reinforced
polypropylene composite blades molded into a low
noise airfoil section. They are designed for maximum
efficiency and are statically and dynamically balanced
for vibration free operation. They are directly driven
by independent motors and positioned for vertical air
discharge. The fan guards are constructed of heavy
gauge, rust resistant, coated steel.
Motors – The IP54 fan motors are Totally Enclosed AirOver, squirrel cage type, current protected. They feature
ball bearings that are double sealed and permanently
lubricated.
Ambient Kit (High) – Required if units are to operate
when the ambient temperature is above 46°C (115°F).
Includes discharge pressure transducers.
All controls are contained in a NEMA 3R/12 cabinet
with hinged outer door and include Liquid Crystal
Display with Light Emitting Diode backlighting for
outdoor viewing:
• Two display lines
• Twenty characters per line
DISPLAY/PRINT of typical information:
• Chilled liquid temperatures
• Ambient temperature
• System pressures (each circuit)
• Operating hours and starts (each compressor)
• Print calls up to the liquid crystal display
• Operating data for the systems
• History of fault shutdown data for up to the last
six fault shutdown conditions.
• An RS-232 port, in conjunction with this press-toprint button, is provided to permit the capability
of hard copy print-outs via a separate printer (by
others).
ENTRY section to:
ENTER setpoints or modify system values.
SETPOINTS updating can be performed to:
• Chilled liquid temperature setpoint and range
• Remote reset temperature range
• Set daily schedule/holiday for start/stop
• Manual override for servicing
• Low and high ambient cutouts
• Number of compressors
• Low liquid temperature cutout
• Low suction pressure cutout
• High discharge pressure cutout
• Anti-recycle timer (compressor start cycle
time)
• Anti-coincident timer (delay compressor starts)
UNIT section to:
• Set time
• Set unit options
A color coded 12-button non-tactile keypad provides
user access to:
18
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
UNIT ON/OFF switch
The microprocessor control center is capable of
displaying the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Return and leaving liquid temperature
Low leaving liquid temperature cutout setting
Low ambient temperature cutout setting
Outdoor air temperature
English or Metric data
Suction pressure cutout setting
Each system suction pressure
Discharge pressure (optional)
Liquid Temperature Reset via a Johnson Controls
ISN DDC or Building Automation System (by
others) via a pulse width modulated (PWM) input
as standard.
Anti-recycle timer status for each system
Anti-coincident system start timer condition
Compressor run status
No cooling load condition
Day, date and time
Daily start/stop times
Holiday status
Automatic or manual system lead/lag control
Lead system definition
Compressor starts & operating hours
(each compressor)
Status of hot gas valves, evaporator heater
and fan operation
Run permissive status
Number of compressors running
Liquid solenoid valve status
Load & unload timer status
Water pump status
The operating program is stored in non-volatile memory
(EPROM) to eliminate chiller failure due to AC powered
failure/battery discharge. Programmed setpoints are
retained in lithium battery-backed RTC memory for 5
years minimum.
HIGH AMBIENT KIT
Allows units to operate when the ambient temperature
is above 46°C (115°F). Includes discharge pressure
transducers.
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
INTERFACE
The Microprocessor Board can accept a 4-20 milliamp,
0-10VDC input to reset the leaving chiller liquid
temperature from a Building Automation System.
• The standard unit capabilities include remote
start-stop, remote water temperature reset via up
to two stages of demand (load) limiting depending
on model.
• The standard control panel can be directly connected to a Johnson Controls Building Automated
System via the standard on-board RS232 communication port.
POWER PANEL
Each panel contains:
• Compressor power terminals
• Compressor motor starting contactors per
I.E.C.**
• Control power terminals to accept incoming for
115-1-60 control power
• Fan contactors & overload current protection
The power wiring is routed through liquid-tight conduit
to the compressors and fans.
Provisions are included for pumpdown at shutdown;
optional remote chilled water temperature reset, and two
steps of demand load limiting from an external building
automation system. Unit alarm contacts are standard.
* Intensity of Protection European Standard
** International Electrotechnical Commission
JOHNSON CONTROLS
19
2
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
POWER OPTIONS
COMPRESSOR POWER CONNECTIONS
Single-point terminal block connection(s) are provided
as standard. The following power connections are available as options. (See electrical data for specific voltage
and options availability.) (Factory-mounted)
SINGLE-POINT SUPPLY TERMINAL BLOCK
Includes enclosure, terminal-block and interconnecting wiring to the compressors. Separate external
protection must be supplied, by others, in the incoming compressor-power wiring. (Do not include this
option if either the Single-Point Non-Fused Disconnect Switch or Single-Point Circuit Breaker options
have been included.)
SINGLE-POINT NON-FUSED DISCONNECT
SWITCH
Unit-mounted disconnect switch (es) with external,
lockable handle (in compliance with Article 440-14
of N.E.C.), can be supplied to isolate the unit power
voltage for servicing. Separate external fusing must
be supplied, by others in the power wiring, which
must comply with the National Electrical Code and/
or local codes.
SINGLE-POINT NON-FUSED DISCONNECT
SWITCH WITH INDIVIDUAL SYSTEM
BREAKERS
Includes unit-mounted disconnect switch with external, lockable handles (in compliance with Article
440-14 of N.E.C.) to isolate unit power voltage for
servicing. Factory interconnecting wiring is provided
from the disconnect switch to factory supplied system
circuit breakers.
SINGLE-POINT CIRCUIT BREAKER
A unit mounted circuit breaker with external, lockable handle (in compliance with N.E.C. Article
440-14); can be supplied to isolate the power voltage
for servicing. (This option includes the Single-Point
Power connection.)
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
Will correct unit compressor power factors to a 0.900.95. (Factory-mounted)
CONTROL OPTIONS
AMBIENT KIT (LOW)
Units will operate to -1°C (30.0°F). This accessory includes all necessary components to permit chiller operation to -18°C (0°F). (This option includes the Discharge
Pressure Transducer / Readout Capability option.) For
proper head pressure control in applications below -1°C
(30°F) where wind gusts may exceed 8 kph (5 mph),
it is recommended that Optional Condenser Louvered
Enclosure Panels also be included. (Factory-mounted)
AMBIENT KIT (HIGH)
Required if units are to operate when the ambient
temperature is above 46°C (115°F). Includes discharge
pressure transducers
LANGUAGE LCD AND KEYPAD DISPLAY
Spanish, French, German, and Italian unit LCD controls and keypad display available. Standard language
is English.
COMPRESSOR, PIPING, EVAPORATOR
OPTIONS
LOW TEMPERATURE BRINE
Required for brine chilling below -1°C (30°F) leaving
brine temperature. Option includes resized thermal
expansion valve. (Factory-mounted)
CHICAGO CODE RELIEF VALVES
Unit will be provided with relief valves to meet Chicago
code requirements. (Factory-mounted)
SERVICE ISOLATION VALVE
Service suction and discharge (ball type) isolation valves
are added to unit per system (discharge service ball-type
isolation valve is standard on each circuit).
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
Converts unit power voltage to 115-1-60 (0.5 or 1.0
KVA capacity). Factory mounting includes primary
and secondary wiring between the transformer and the
control panel. (Factory-mounted)
20
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
HOT GAS BY-PASS
Permits continuous, stable operation at capacities below
the minimum step of compressor unloading to as low
as 5% capacity (depending on both the unit and operating conditions) by introducing an artificial load on the
cooler. Hot gas by-pass is installed on only refrigerant
system #1 on two-circuited units. (Factory- mounted)
HYDRO-KIT
Factory installed Hydro-Kit suitable for water glycol
systems with up to 35% glycol at leaving temperatures
down to 20° F. The Hydro-kit option is available in a
single or dual configuration (dual as standby duty only),
with totally enclosed permanently lubricated pump
motors.
DX COOLER 300 (21 BAR) PSIG DWP WATERSIDE
The waterside will be of 300 PSIG (21 bar) instead of the
standard 150 PSIG DWP. 300 PSIG R.F. flanges are included on the DX cooler nozzles. (Factory-mounted) The
companion flanges will be field-supplied by others.
The hydro-kit option comes standard with a balancing valve, flow switch, pressure ports, suction guide,
strainer, bleed and drain valves and frost protection.
FLANGES (ANSI/AWWA C-606 COUPLINGS
TYPE)
Consists of (2) flange adapters for grooved end pipe
(standard 10.5 bar [150 psi] cooler). (Not available on
optional DX cooler 21 bar (300 psi) DWP waterside.)
(Field-mounted)
FLOW SWITCH
The flow switch or its equivalent must be furnished
with each unit.
150 PSIG (10.5 BAR) DWP
For standard units. Johnson Controls model F61MG1C Vapor-proof SPDT, NEMA 3R switch (10.5 bar
[150 psig] DWP), -29°C to 121°C (-20°F to 250°F),
with 1" NPT connection for upright mounting in
horizontal pipe. (Field-mounted)
FLOW SWITCH ACCESSORY
Vapor proof SPDT, NEMA 3R switch, 10.3 barg (150
psig) DWP, -7°C to 121°C (20°F to 250°F) with 1" NPT
(IPS) connection for upright mounting in horizontal pipe
(this flow switch or equivalent must be furnished with
each unit). (Field-mounted)
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
Alternative to an above mentioned flow switch. Vapor
proof SPDT, NEMA 3R switch, 10.3 barg (150 psig)
DWP, -7°C to 121°C (20°F to 250°F) with 1" NPT
(IPS) connection for upright mounting in horizontal
pipe (This flow switch or equivalent must be furnished
with each unit).
Expansion tanks are optional within the Hydro-Kit
option.
CONDENSER AND CABINET OPTIONS
Condenser coil protection against corrosive environments is available by choosing any of the following
options. For additional application recommendations,
refer to FORM 150.1 -ES1. (Factory-mounted)
POST-COATED DIPPED CONDENSER
COILS
The unit is built with dipped-cured condenser coils.
This is the choice for corrosive applications (with
the exception of strong alkalis, oxidizers and wet
bromine, chlorine and fluorine in concentrations
greater than 100 ppm).
ENCLOSURE PANELS (UNIT)
Tamperproof Enclosure Panels prevent unauthorized
access to units. Enclosure Panels can provide an
aesthetically pleasing alternative to expensive fencing. Additionally, for proper head pressure control,
Johnson Controls recommends the use of Condenser
Louvered Panels for winter applications where wind
gusts may exceed five miles per hour. The following
types of enclosure panels are available:
WIRE PANELS (FULL UNIT)
Consists of welded wire-mesh guards mounted
on the exterior of the unit. Prevents unauthorized access, yet provides free air flow. (Factorymounted)
WIRE/LOUVERED PANELS
Consists of welded wiremesh panels on the bottom
part of unit and louvered panels on the condenser
section of the unit. (Factory- mounted).
JOHNSON CONTROLS
21
2
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
LOUVERED PANELS (CONDENSER COIL
ONLY)
Louvered panels are mounted on the sides and ends
of the condenser coils for protection. (Factorymounted)
LOUVERED PANELS (FULL UNIT)
Louvered panels surround the front, back, and
sides of the unit. They prevent unauthorized access
and visually screen unit components. Unrestricted
air flow is permitted through generously sized
louvered openings. This option is applicable for
any outdoor design ambient temperature up to 46°
(115°F). (Factory-mounted)
COIL END HAIL GUARD
Louvered panel attached to exposed coil end.
(Factory-mounted)
22
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SOUND ATTENUATION
One or both of the following sound attenuation options
are recommended for residential or other similar sound
sensitive locations:
COMPRESSOR ACOUSTIC SOUND BLANKET
Each compressor is individually enclosed by an
acoustic sound blanket. The sound blankets are made
with one layer of acoustical absorbent textile fiber of
15mm (5/8") thickness; one layer of anti-vibrating
heavy material thickness of 3 mm (1/8"). Both are
closed by two sheets of welded PVC, reinforced for
temperature and UV resistance. (Factory-mounted)
ULTRA QUIET FANS
Lower RPM, 8-pole fan motors are used with steeperpitch fans. (Factory-mounted)
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
Level adjusting, spring type 25.4mm (1") or seismic
deflection or neoprene pad isolators for mounting under
unit base rails. (Field-mounted)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
UNIT COMPONENTS
2
FAN DECK
POWER
PANEL
CONTROL
PANEL
MICROCHANNEL
COILS
LIQUID
TIGHT
CONDUIT
COMPRESSORS
FILTER
DRIERS
FORMED
BASE
RAIL
SIGHT
GLASS
TXV
VALVES
EVAPORATOR
LD14317
FIG. 1 – UNIT COMPONENTS FRONT
JOHNSON CONTROLS
23
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
UNIT COMPONENTS (CONT)
FAN ASSEMBLIES
CONDENSER
COILS
CONDENSER
COILS
EVAPORATOR
RECEIVERS
LD13426
FIG. 2 – UNIT COMPONENTS SIDE
24
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
CONTROL / POWER PANEL COMPONENTS
FAN FUSES
FAN CONTACTORS
2
DISCONNECT
SWITCH
FAN CONTACTOR
COMPRESSOR
OVERLOADS
XTBF1
COMPRESSOR
CONTACTORS
LD13247
FIG. 3 – POWER PANEL COMPONENTS
JOHNSON CONTROLS
25
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
CONTROL / POWER PANEL COMPONENTS (CONT)
FAN FUSES
FAN CONTACTORS
CONTROL
RELAY
MICROCOMPUTER
CONTROL
CENTER
MICROPANEL
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
COMPRESSOR
OVERLOADS
XTBC1
XTBC2
COMPRESSOR
CONTACTORS
XTBF2
MICROBOARD
LD13248
FIG. 4 – POWER PANEL / CONTROL COMPONENTS
26
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)
BASIC UNIT NOMENCLATURE
YLAA0360SE 50XCA
1 2 3 4
BASE PRODUCT TYPE
Y = YORK
L = Scroll
5 6 7 8
A = Air Cooled
Condensing Unit
A = Americas
E = Europe
Four Digit Unit Number
FEATURE
9
10
11 12
NOMINAL
UNIT
REFRIGERANT VOLTAGES
CAPACITY DESIGNATOR
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
S = Standard Efficiency
H = High Efficiency
Z = Standard Efficiency (round tube)
Y = High Efficiency (round tube)
OPTION
13
STARTER
14 15
DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT
LEVEL
E = R-410A
X = Across the Line
50 = 380/415-3-50
A = Development Level
C = Design Series A, B, C
OPTION DESCRIPTION
CONTRACT
CONTRACT NUMBER
NUM
CONTRACT NUMBER = {CONTRACT/NUM}
ORDER
ORDER QUANTITY
QTY
ORDER QUANTITY = { ORDER/QTY }
USA
USA ORIGIN
SHIPWT
SHIPPING WEIGHT
STOCK
CONV
MODEL
STOCK UNIT
STOCK CONVERSION
MODEL (PIN 1-4)
UNIT
UNIT DESIGNATOR (PIN 9)
REF
REFRIGERANT (PIN 10)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
2
N
USA ORIGIN NOT REQUIRED
Y
USA ORIGIN REQUIRED
LBS
CRANE/RIGGING SHIPPING WEIGHT = {LBS}
KG
CRANE/RIGGING SHIPPING WEIGHT = {KG}
N
UNIT BEING BUILT FOR SOLD ORDER
Y
UNIT BEING BUILT FOR STOCK
N
NOT A CONVERSION
C
ORDER BEING CONVERTED FROM STOCK
YLAA
YLAA
0195
0195
0220
0220
0260
0260
0285
0285
0300
0300
0320
0320
0350
0350
0360
0360
0390
0390
0400
0400
0435
0435
0440
0440
0455
0455
0485
0485
0515
0515
S
STANDARD EFFICIENCY
H
HIGH EFFICIENCY
Y
HIGH EFFICIENCY (ROUND TUBE)
Z
STANDARD EFFICIENCY (ROUND TUBE)
E
R-410A
27
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) (CON’T)
FEATURE
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
VOLTS
VOLTAGE (PIN 11 & 12)
STARTER
STARTER (PIN 13)
DESIGN
DESIGN SERIES (PIN 14)
DEV
DEVELOPMENT LEVEL (PIN 15)
POWER
TRANS
PFC
AMB
BAS
LCD
RDOUT
SAFETY
POWER FIELD (PIN 16 & 17)
CNTRL TRANSFORMER (PIN 18)
POWER FACTOR CAPACITOR (19)
AMBIENT KITS (PIN 20)
BAS RESET/OFFSET (PIN 21)
LANGUAGE (PIN 22)
READOUT KITS (PIN 23)
SAFETY CODES (PIN 24)
SENSOR
PIN 25
PUMP
MOTOR CURRENT MODULE
(PIN 26)
REMOTE
REMOTE PANEL (PIN 27)
FEATURE
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
SEQ
SEQUENCE KIT (PIN 28)
28
OPTION
OPTION DESCRIPTION
50
380-415/3/50
X
ACROSS THE LINE STARTER
T
SOFT START
A
DESIGN SERIES A (MICROCHANNEL)
B
DESIGN SERIES B (TUBE AND FIN)
C
DESIGN SERIES C (MICROCHANNEL CE/ETL PANEL)
A
DEVELOPMENT LEVEL A
XX
MP SUPPLY TB
SX
SP SUPPLY TB
SD
SP NF DISCONNECT SWITCH
BX
SP CIRCUIT BREAKER W/ LOCKABLE HANDLE
DB
SP NF DISC SWITCH W/IND SYS CB
MB
MP SUPPLY W/IND SYS CB & L EXT HANDLES
MD
MP NF DISC SWITCHES
X
NO CONTROL TRANSFORMER REQUIRED
T
CONTROL TRANSFORMER REQUIRED
Q
SPECIAL CONTROL TRANSFORMER REQUIRED
X
NO POWER CAPACITOR REQUIRED
C
POWER CAPACITOR REQUIRED
Q
SPECIAL POWER CAPACITOR REQUIRED
H
HIGH AMBIENT KIT STANDARD (FACTORY)
A
BOTH LOW/HIGH AMBIENT KIT REQUIRED (FACTORY)
Q
SPECIAL AMBIENT KIT REQUIRED
T
BAS RESET/OFFSET REQUIRED
Q
SPECIAL BAS RESET/OFFSET REQUIRED
X
ENGLISH
S
SPANISH
F
FRENCH
G
GERMAN
I
ITALIAN
B
BOTH DISCHARGE & SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
READOUT REQUIRED
Q
SPECIAL PRESSURE READOUT REQUIRED
L
N AMERICAN SAFETY CODE (CUL/CETL)
C
EUROPEAN SAFTEY CODE ( CE )
X
X
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
C
MOTOR CURRENT MODULE
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
X
NO REMOTE PANEL REQUIRED
Q
SPECIAL REMOTE PANEL REQUIRED
OPTION
OPTION DESCRIPTION
X
NO SEQUENCE KIT REQUIRED
Q
SPECIAL SEQUENCE KIT REQUIRED
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) (CON’T)
FEATURE
TEMP
CHICAGO
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
LEAVING WATER TEMP(29,30)
CHICAGO CODE KIT (PIN 31)
VALVES
VALVES (PIN 32)
HGBP
HOT GAS BYPASS (PIN 33)
GAUGE
PIN 34
OVERLOAD
PIN 35
PIN36
PIN 36
HTR
CRANKCASE HEATER (PIN 37)
DWP
DWP (PIN 38)
INS
FLANGES
FLOW
VESSEL
INSULATION (PIN 39)
FLANGES (PIN 40)
FLOW SWITCH (PIN 41)
VESSEL CODES (PIN 42)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
OPTION
NUM
QQ
OPTION DESCRIPTION
LEAVING WATER TEMP = {TEMP/NUM} DEGREES
SPECIAL LWT REQUIREMENTS
2
X
NO CHICAGO CODE KIT REQUIRED
B
BOTH CHICAGO CODE & SERV ISOLATION
C
CHICAGO CODE KIT REQUIRED
G
BOTH SUCTION SERVICE VALVE AND DUAL RELIEF VALVE
(EUROPE ONLY)
R
DUAL RELIEF VALVES NO SUCTION SERVICE VALVE
(EUROPE ONLY)
S
SERVICE ISOLATION VALVES
Q
SPECIAL CHICAGO CODE KIT REQUIRED
X
STANDARD VALVES REQ’D
Q
SPECIAL OPTIONAL VALVES REQ’D
X
NO HOT GAS BYPASS REQUIRED
1
HOT GAS BYPASS REQUIRED - 1 CIRCUIT
Q
SPECIAL HOT GAS BYPASS REQUIRED
X
X
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
X
X
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
X
X
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
H
CRANKCASE HEATER STANDARD
Q
SPECIAL CRANKCASE HEATER REQUIRED
X
150PSIG DWP WATERSIDE
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
X
STANDARD INSULATION
D
DOUBLE THICK INSULATION
Q
SPECIAL INSULATION REQUIRED
X
NO FLANGES REQUIRED
V
VICTAULIC FLANGES REQUIRED
Q
SPECIAL FLANGES REQUIRED
X
NO FLOW SWITCH REQUIRED
S
ONE FLOW SWITCH REQUIRED
T
TWO FLOW SWITCHES REQUIRED
U
THREE FLOW SWITCHES REQUIRED
D
ONE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH REQUIRED
E
TWO DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES REQUIRED
F
THREE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES REQUIRED
Q
SPECIAL FLOW SWITCH REQUIRED
A
ASME PRESSURE VESSEL CODES
E
PED PRESSURE VESSEL CODES
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
29
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) (CON’T)
FEATURE
CLR
FEATURE
PIN44
COILS
HEAT
FANMOTORS
ENCL
ACOUSTIC
SRDOCS
30
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
COOLER (PIN 43)
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
PIN 44
COILS (PIN 45)
HEAT RECOVERY (PIN 46)
FAN MOTORS (PIN 47)
ENCLOSURE PANELS (PIN 48)
ACOUSTIC BLANKET (PIN 49)
SR DOCUMENTS (PIN 50)
OPTION
OPTION DESCRIPTION
X
STANDARD COOLER REQUIRED
R
REMOTE COOLER REQUIRED
Q
SPECIAL COOLER REQUIRED
OPTION
OPTION DESCRIPTION
X
X
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
X
ALUMINUM COILS
C
COPPER FIN COILS
B
PRE-COATED FIN COILS
P
POST-COATED DIPPED COILS
Q
SPECIAL COILS
X
NO OPTION REQUIRED
H
HEAT RECOVERY
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
X
TEAO FAN MOTORS
Q
SPECIAL FAN MOTORS REQUIRED
X
NO ENCLOSURE REQUIRED
1
WIRE (FULL UNIT) ENCL PANELS (FACTORY)
2
WIRE (FULL UNIT) ENCL PANELS (FIELD)
3
WIRE/LOUVERED ENCL PANELS (FACTORY)
4
WIRE/LOUVERED ENCL PANELS (FIELD)
5
LOUVERED (COND ONLY) ENCL PANELS (FACTORY)
6
LOUVERED (COND ONLY) ENCL PANELS (FIELD)
7
LOUVERED (FULL UNIT) ENCL PANELS (FACTORY)
8
LOUVERED (FULL UNIT) ENCL PANELS (FIELD)
9
END LOUVER (END HAIL GUARD) ENCL PANELS
(FACTORY)
A
END LOUVER (END HAIL GUARD) ENCL PANELS (FIELD)
B
AESTHETIC PANEL KIT ONLY (FACTORY)
C
AESTHETIC PANEL KIT ONLY (FIELD)
D
AESTHETIC PANEL KIT PLUS HAIL GUARDS (FACTORY)
E
AESTHETIC PANEL KIT PLUS HAIL GUARDS (FIELD)
Q
SPECIAL ENCLOSURE PANELS
X
NO ACOUSTIC BLANKET REQUIRED
B
ACOUSTIC BLANKET REQUIRED
E
ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE
Q
SPECIAL ACOUSTIC BLANKET REQUIRED
X
NO DOCUMENTS REQUIRED
A
BASE, MATERIAL & WITNESS DOCUMENTS
B
BASE DOCUMENT
M
BASE & MATERIAL DOCUMENTS
W
BASE & WITNESS DOCUMENTS
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) (CON’T)
FEATURE
PIN 51
FANS
PAINT
FEATURE
ISOL
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
PIN 51
SOUND FANS (PIN 52)
PIN 53
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
(PIN 54)
OPTION
OPTION DESCRIPTION
X
X
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
X
STANDARD LOW SOUND FANS REQUIRED
A
HIGH AIRFLOW FANS REQUIRED (VENDOR SPECIFIC)
E
LOW SOUND FANS REQUIRED (VENDOR SPECIFIC)
L
ULTRA QUIET FANS REQUIRED
S
HIGH STATIC FANS REQUIRED (VENDOR SPECIFIC)
U
ULTRA QUIET FANS REQUIRED (VENDOR SPECIFIC)
2
TWO SPEED FANS REQUIRED (VENDOR SPECIFIC)
Q
SPECIAL SOUND FANS REQUIRED
X
X
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
OPTION
OPTION DESCRIPTION
X
NO ISOLATORS REQUIRED
1
1" DEFLECTION ISOLATORS REQUIRED
N
NEOPRENE ISOLATORS REQUIRED
S
SEISMIC ISOLATORS REQUIRED
Q
SPECIAL ISOLATORS REQUIRED
PIN 55
PIN 55
MARKETING PURPOSES ONLY!
PIN 56
PIN 56
MARKETING PURPOSES ONLY!
SHIP
PIN 58
SHIP INSTRUCTIONS (PIN 57)
PIN 58
JOHNSON CONTROLS
2
X
NO CONTAINERIZATION REQUIRED WITH SHIPPING BAG
A
BUY AMERICAN ACT COMPLIANCE WITH SHIPPING BAG
B
BOTH BUY AMERICAN ACT COMPLIANCE AND CONTAINER
SHIPPED WITHOUT SHIPPING BAG (FACTORY PREP)
C
CONTAINER SHIPPED WITHOUT SHIPPING BAG (FACTORY
LOAD)
N
NO CONTAINERIZATION REQUIRED WITHOUT SHIPPING
BAG
P
CONTAINER SHIPPED WITHOUT SHIPPING BAG (FACTORY
PREP)
U
BUY AMERICAN ACT COMPLIANCE WITHOUT SHIPPING
BAG
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
MARKETING PURPOSES ONLY!
31
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) (CON’T)
FEATURE
PKG
PKGOPT
MFG
LOC
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
PUMP PACKAGE (PIN 59)
PUMP PACKAGE OPTIONS
(PIN 60)
PLANT OF MFG (PIN 61)
MFG LOCATION
YW
YORKWORKS VERSION
SQ
SPECIAL QUOTE
32
OPTION
OPTION DESCRIPTION
X
NO PUMP REQUIRED
A
PUMP KIT A REQUIRED
B
PUMP KIT B REQUIRED
C
PUMP KIT C REQUIRED
D
PUMP KIT D REQUIRED
E
PUMP KIT E REQUIRED
F
PUMP KIT F REQUIRED
G
PUMP KIT G REQUIRED
H
PUMP KIT H REQUIRED
I
PUMP KIT I REQUIRED
J
PUMP KIT J REQUIRED
K
PUMP KIT K REQUIRED
L
PUMP KIT L REQUIRED
M
PUMP KIT M REQUIRED
N
PUMP KIT N REQUIRED
O
PUMP KIT O REQUIRED
P
PUMP KIT P REQUIRED
R
PUMP KIT R REQUIRED
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
X
NO OPTION REQUIRED
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
R
PLANT OF MANUFACTURE - MONTERREY
S
PLANT OF MANUFACTURE - SABADELL
CUR
CURITIBA, BRAZIL
MEX
MEXICO, ES
MTY
MONTERREY, BE
SAT
SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS
CV
YORKWORKS CONFIGURATION VERSION {YW/CV}
UV
YORKWORKS UPLOAD VERSION {YW/UV}
Q
SPECIAL QUOTE
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) (CON’T)
2
AIR COOLED CONDENSERS
YLAA REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM
(INCLUDING TEMPERATURE SENSORS & PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS)
* HOT GAS OPTION - SYSTEM 1 ONLY
SIGHT GLASS /
MOISTURE INDICATOR
LIQUID LINE FILTER / DRIER
LIQUID LINE
SERVICE VALVE
LIQUID LINE
SOLENOID VALVE
HOT DISCHARGE
GAS LINE
OPTIONAL
DISCHARGE LINE
BALL VALVE
* SOLENOID OPERATED
HOT GAS BY PASS VALVE
OPTIONAL DISCHARGE
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
OPTIONAL
SERVICE VALVE
HIGH PRESSURE
CUTOUT SWITCH
OPTIONAL
SERVICE
VALVE
TXV
OPTIONAL
SUCTION LINE
BALL VALVE
EQUALIZER
LINE
OPTIONAL
RELIEF VALVE
DX COOLER
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH OR
SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
RETURN WATER
TEMP. SENSOR
LEAVING
LEAVING CHILLED WATER CHILLED WATER
TEMP. SENSOR
2 OR 3 COMPRESSORS PER SYSTEM
ENTERING CHILLED WATER
OIL EQUALIZING
LINE
LD13138A
FIG. 5 – REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM
JOHNSON CONTROLS
33
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM
Control Functions:
DV - Display Value
CHT - Chilled Liquid Temperature
HPC - High Pressure Cutout
LPC - Low Pressure Cutout
HPL - High Pressure Load Limiting
LTC - Low Temperature Cutout
Fans
Fans
Components:
Pressure Relief Valve
Service (Ball) Valve
Expansion Valve
Condenser
S
Solenoid Valve
Sight Glass
Sensor Pressure
or Temperature
585 PSIG
PS
DV
HPL
HPC
Service (Stop) Access Valve
P
650 PSIG
ZCPR-3
ZCPR-2
PS
Filter Drier
(Removable Core)
See P.R.V.
Options
ZCPR-1
Pressure Switch
Chilled
Liquid
450 PSIG
Evaporator
Compressors
DV
LPC
P
Ambient Air Sensor
DV
T
HTC
LTC
Chilled
Liquid
S
T
DV
CHT
LTC
-YLLSV
LD13139
Lowpressure
pressureliquid
liquidrefrigerant
refrigerantenters
entersthe
thecooler
coolerand
andisis
Low
evaporated
and
superheated
by
the
heat
energy
evaporated and superheated by the heat energy absorbed
absorbed
from the
chilled
liquid through
passing the
through
the
from
the chilled
liquid
passing
cooler
cooler shell. Low pressure vapour enters the
shell.
Low pressure vapor enters the compressor where
compressor where pressure and superheat are
pressure
and The
superheat
are increased.
Theishigh
increased.
high pressure
vapour
fed pressure
to the air
vapor is fed to the air cooled condenser coil and fans
where the heat is removed. The fully condensed and
subcooled liquid passes through the expansion valve
where pressure is reduced and further cooling takes
place before returning to the cooler.
cooled condenser coil and fans where the heat is
removed. The fully condensed and subcooled liquid
passes through the expansion valve where pressure is
reduced and further cooling takes place before
returning to the cooler.
FIG. 6 – PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM
34
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 3 – HANDLING AND STORAGE
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
To ensure consistent quality and maximum reliability,
all units are tested and inspected before leaving the
factory. Units are shipped completely assembled and
containing refrigerant under pressure. Units are shipped
without export crating unless crating has been specified
on the Sales Order.
If the unit is to be put into storage, prior to installation,
the following precautions should be observed:
• The chiller must be “blocked” so that the base is
not permitted to sag or bow.
• Ensure that all openings, such as water connections, are securely capped.
• Do not store where exposed to ambient air temperatures exceeding 110 °F (43 °C).
• The condensers should be covered to protect
the fins from potential damage and corrosion,
particularly where building work is in progress.
• The unit should be stored in a location where
there is minimal activity in order to limit the risk
of accidental physical damage.
• To prevent inadvertent operation of the pressure relief devices the unit must not be steam
cleaned.
• It is recommended that the unit is periodically
inspected during storage.
MOVING THE CHILLER
Prior to moving the unit, ensure that the installation site
is suitable for installing the unit and is easily capable
of supporting the weight of the unit and all associated
services.
The units are designed to be lifted using cables. A
spreader bar or frame should be used in order to prevent
damage to the unit from the lifting chains.
Units are provided with lifting eyes in the sides of the
base frame, which can be attached to directly using
shackles or safety hooks.
The unit must only be lifted by the base
frame at the points provided. Never
move the unit on rollers, or lift the unit
using a forklift truck.
Care should be taken to avoid damaging the condenser
cooling fins when moving the unit.
Lifting Weights
For details of weights and weight distribution, refer to
the data shipped in the chiller information packet and
unit nameplate.
The unit should be lifted by inserting
hooks through the holes provided in
unit base rails. Spreader bars should
be used to avoid crushing the unit
frame rails with the lifting chains (See
below).
INSPECTION
Remove any transit packing and inspect the unit to
ensure that all components have been delivered and that
no damage has occurred during transit. If any damage
is evident, it should be noted on the carrier’s freight bill
and a claim entered in accordance with the instructions
given on the advice note.
Major damage must be reported immediately to your
local Johnson Controls representative.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
35
3
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 3 – HANDLING AND STORAGE
Typical Lifting Arrangement - 8 Fan Models
LD13137
Use spreader bars to avoid lifting chains hitting the
chiller.
Never lift the chiller using a forklift or
by hooking to the top rails. Use only
the lifting holes provided.
Lifting Instructions are placed on a label on the chiller
and on the shipping bag.
LD13140
Typical Lifting Arrangement - 4 Fan Models
FIG. 7 – UNIT RIGGING/LIFTING
36
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
To ensure warranty coverage, this
equipment must be commissioned and
serviced by an authorized Johnson
Controls service mechanic or a qualified service person experienced in
chiller installation. Installation must
comply with all applicable codes, particularly in regard to electrical wiring
and other safety elements such as relief valves, HP cutout settings, design
working pressures, and ventilation requirements consistent with the amount
and type of refrigerant charge.
Lethal voltages exist within the control
panels. Before servicing, open and tag
all disconnect switches.
INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
The following items, 1 through 5, must be checked
before placing the units in operation.
1.Inspect the unit for shipping damage.
2.Rig unit using spreader bars.
3.Open the unit only to install water piping system.
Do not remove protective covers from water connections until piping is ready for attachment. Check
water piping to ensure cleanliness.
4.Pipe unit using good piping practice (see ASHRAE
handbook section 215 and 195).
5.Check to see that the unit is installed and operated
within limitations (Refer to LIMITATIONS).
The following pages outline detailed procedures to be
followed to install and start-up the chiller.
HANDLING
These units are shipped as completely assembled units
containing full operating charge, and care should be
taken to avoid damage due to rough handling.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
INSPECTION
Immediately upon receiving the unit, it should be
inspected for possible damage which may have
occurred during transit. If damage is evident, it should
be noted in the carrier’s freight bill. A written request
for inspection by the carrier’s agent should be made at
once. See “Instruction” manual, Form 50.15-NM for
more information and details.
LOCATION AND CLEARANCES
The YLAA chillers are designed for outdoor installation.
When selecting a site for installation, be guided by the
following conditions:
1. For outdoor locations of the unit, select a place
having an adequate supply of fresh air for the condenser.
2. Avoid locations beneath windows or between
structures where normal operating sounds may be
objectionable.
3. Installation sites may be either on a roof, or at
ground level. (See “Foundation” within this section
of the IOM.)
4. The condenser fans are the propeller-type, and are
not recommended for use with duct work in the
condenser air stream.
5. When it is desirable to surround the unit(s), it is
recommended that the screening be able to pass
the required chiller l/s (CFM) without exceeding
0.1" of water external static pressure.
6. Protection against corrosive environments is available by supplying the units with either copper fin,
cured phenolic, or epoxy coating on the condenser
coils. The phenolic or epoxy coils should be offered
with any units being installed at the seashore or
where salt spray may hit the unit.
In installations where winter operation is intended and
snow accumulations are expected, additional height must
be provided to ensure normal condenser air flow.
Recommended clearances for units are listed under
“Notes” in the “Dimensions” section of this IOM.
When the available space is less, the unit(s) must be
equipped with the discharge pressure transducer option
to permit high pressure unloading in the event that air
recirculation were to occur.
37
4
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
Foundation
The unit should be mounted on a flat and level
foundation, floor, or rooftop capable of supporting
the entire operating weight of the equipment. See
PHYSICAL DATA for operating weights. If the unit is
elevated beyond the normal reach of service personnel,
a suitable catwalk must be capable of supporting service
personnel, their equipment, and the compressors.
Ground Level Locations
It is important that the units be installed on a substantial
base that will not settle. A one piece concrete slab
with footers extended below the frost line is highly
recommended. Additionally, the slab should not be
tied to the main building foundations as noise and
vibration may be transmitted. Mounting holes (5/8"
dia.) are provided in the steel channel for bolting the
unit to its foundation (see DIMENSIONS).
For ground level installations, precautions should be
taken to protect the unit from tampering by or injury to
unauthorized persons. Screws and/or latches on access
panels will prevent casual tampering. However, further
safety precautions such as a fenced-in enclosure or
locking devices on the panels may be advisable.
Rooftop Locations
Choose a spot with adequate structural strength to
safely support the entire weight of the unit and service
personnel. Care must be taken not to damage the roof.
Consult the building contractor or architect if the roof is
bonded. Roof installations should have wooden beams
(treated to reduce deterioration), cork, rubber, or spring
type vibration isolators under the base to minimize
vibration.
Noise Sensitive Locations
Efforts should be made to assure that the chiller is not
located next to occupied spaces or noise sensitive areas
where chiller noise level would be a problem. Chiller
noise is a result of compressor and fan operation.
38
SPRING ISOLATORS (OPTIONAL)
When ordered, four (4) isolators will be furnished.
Identify the isolator, locate at the proper mounting point,
and adjust per instructions.
COMPRESSOR MOUNTING
The compressors are mounted on four (4) rubber
isolators. The mounting bolts should not be loosened
or adjusted at installation of the chiller.
REMOTE COOLER OPTION
Not available at this time.
CHILLED LIQUID PIPING
General – When the unit(s) has been located in its
final position, the unit water piping may be connected.
Normal installation precautions should be observed in
order to receive maximum operating efficiencies. Piping
should be kept free of all foreign matter. All chilled water
evaporator piping must comply in all respects with local
plumbing codes and ordinances.
Since elbows, tees and valves decrease pump capacity,
all piping should be kept as straight and as simple as
possible. All piping must be supported independent
of the chiller.
Consideration should be given to compressor access when laying out water
piping. Routing the water piping too
close to the unit could make compressor servicing/replacement difficult.
Hand stop valves should be installed in all lines to
facilitate servicing.
Piping to the inlet and outlet connections of the chiller
should include high-pressure rubber hose or piping
loops to ensure against transmission of water pump
vibration. The necessary components must be obtained
in the field.
Drain connections should be provided at all low points
to permit complete drainage of the cooler and system
water piping.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
A small valve or valves should be installed at the highest
point or points in the chilled water piping to allow any
trapped air to be purged. Vent and drain connections
should be extended beyond the insulation to make them
accessible.
The Flow Switch MUST NOT be used
to start and stop the chiller (i.e. starting and stopping the chilled water
pump). It is intended only as a safety
switch.
The piping to and from the cooler must be designed to
suit the individual installation. It is important that the
following considerations be observed:
PIPEWORK ARRANGEMENT
The following are suggested pipework arrangements for
single unit installations, for multiple unit installations,
each unit should be piped as shown.
1.The chilled liquid piping system should be laid out
so that the circulating pump discharges directly
into the cooler. The suction for this pump should
be taken from the piping system return line and not
the cooler. This piping scheme is recommended,
but is not mandatory.
Recommendations of the Building Services
Research Association.
4
2.The inlet and outlet cooler connection sizes are
provided in Table 4 (Physical Data).
3.A strainer, preferably 40 mesh, must be installed
in the cooler inlet line just ahead of the cooler. This
is important to protect the cooler from entrance of
large particles which could cause damage to the
evaporator.
4.All chilled liquid piping should be thoroughly
flushed to free it from foreign material before
the system is placed into operation. Use care not
to flush any foreign material into or through the
cooler.
5.As an aid to servicing, thermometers and pressure
gauges should be installed in the inlet and outlet
water lines.
6.The chilled water lines that are exposed to outdoor
ambients should be wrapped with supplemental
heater cable and insulated to protect against freezeup during low ambient periods, and to prevent
formation of condensation on lines in warm humid
locations. As an alternative, ethylene glycol should
be added to protect against freeze-up during low
ambient periods.
7.A chilled water flow switch, (either by YORK or
others) MUST be installed in the leaving water
piping of the cooler. There should be a straight
horizontal run of at least 5 diameters on each side
of the switch. Adjust the flow switch paddle to the
size of the pipe in which it is to be installed (see
manufacturer’s instructions furnished with the
switch). The switch is to be wired to Terminals
13 – 14 of XTBC1 located in the control panel, as
shown on the unit wiring diagram.
LD06596
ISOLATING VALVE - NORMALLY OPEN
ISOLATING VALVE - NORMALLY CLOSED
FLOW REGULATING VALVE
FLOW MEASUREMENT DEVICE
STRAINER
PRESSURE TAPPING
FLOW SWITCH
FLANGED CONNECTION
LD06597
FIG. 8 – CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM
JOHNSON CONTROLS
39
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
DUCT WORK CONNECTION
General Requirements
The following duct work recommendations are intended
to ensure satisfactory operation of the unit. Failure to
follow these recommendations could cause damage to
the unit, or loss of performance, and may invalidate the
warranty.
When ducting is to be fitted to the fan discharge it is
recommended that the duct should be the same crosssectional area as the fan outlet and straight for at least
three feet (1 meter) to obtain static regain from the fan.
Duct work should be suspended with flexible hangers
to prevent noise and vibration being transmitted to the
structure. A flexible joint is also recommended between
the duct attached to the fan and the next section for the
same reason. Flexible connectors should not be allowed
to concertina.
Copper power wiring only should be used for supplying
power to the chiller. This is recommended to avoid safety
and reliability issues resulting from connection failure at
the power connections to the chiller. Aluminum wiring
is not recommended due to thermal characteristics
that may cause loose terminations resulting from the
contraction and expansion of the wiring. Aluminum
oxide may also build up at the termination causing hot
spots and eventual failure. If aluminum wiring is used
to supply power to the chiller, AL-CU compression
fittings should be used to transition from aluminum to
copper. This transition should be done in an external
box separate to the power panel. Copper conductors
can then be run from the box to the chiller.
A 120-1-60, 15 amp source must be supplied for the
control panel through a fused disconnect when a control
panel transformer (optional) is not provided (Refer to
Fig. 9).
The unit(s) is not designed to take structural loading. No
significant amount of weight should be allowed to rest
on the fan outlet flange, deck assemblies or condenser
coil module. No more than 3 feet (1 meter) of light
construction duct work should be supported by the unit.
Where cross winds may occur, any duct work must be
supported to prevent side loading on the unit.
See unit wiring diagrams for field and power wiring
connections, chilled water pump starter contacts,
alarm contacts, compressor run status contacts, PWM
input, and load limit input. Refer to the section on
“Unit Operation” located in this IOM for a detailed
description of operation concerning aforementioned
contacts and inputs.
If the ducts from two or more fans are to be combined
into a common duct, back-flow dampers should be
fitted in the individual fan ducts. This will prevent recirculation of air when only one of the fans is running.
Evaporator Pump Start Contacts
Units are supplied with outlet guards for safety and
to prevent damage to the fan blades. If these guards
are removed to fit duct work, adequate alternative
precautions must be taken to ensure persons cannot be
harmed or put at risk from rotating fan blades.
WIRING
Liquid Chillers are shipped with all factory-mounted
controls wired for operation.
Field Wiring – Power wiring must be provided through
a fused disconnect switch to the unit terminals (or
optional molded disconnect switch) in accordance with
N.E.C. or local code requirements. Minimum circuit
ampacity and maximum dual element fuse size are
given in Tables 6.
40
Terminal Block XTBC2 – Terminals 23 to 24, are nor­
mally open contacts that can be used to switch field
supplied power to provide a start signal to the evapo­rator
pump contactor. The contacts will be closed when any
of the following conditions occur:
1.Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Fault
2.Any compressor is running
3.Daily schedule is not programmed OFF and the Unit Switch is ON
The pump will not run if the micropanel has been
powered up for less than 30 seconds, or if the pump
has run in the last 30 seconds, to prevent pump motor
overheating. Refer to Fig. 10 and unit wiring dia­
gram.
System Run Contacts
Contacts are available to monitor system status.
Normally‑open auxiliary contacts from each com­pressor
contactor are wired in parallel with XTBC2 – Terminals
25 to 26 for system 1, and XTBC2 – Terminals 27 to
28 for system 2. Refer to Fig. 4, 10 and unit wiring
diagram.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
Alarm Status Contacts
Load Limit Input
Normally‑open contacts are available for each re­frigerant
system. These normally‑open contacts close when the
system is functioning normally. The respective contacts
will open when the unit is shut down on a unit fault, or
locked out on a system fault. Field connections are at
XTBC2 - Terminals 29 to 30 (system 1), and Terminals
31 to 32 (system 2).
Load limiting is a feature that prevents the unit from
loading beyond a desired value. The unit can be
“load limited” either 33%, 40%, 50%, 66% or 80%,
depending on the number of compressors on unit. The
field connections are wired to XTBC1 – Terminals 13
to 21, and work in conjunction with the PWM inputs. A
detailed explanation is provided in the “Unit Controls”
section of this IOM. Refer to Fig. 4, 10 and unit wiring
diagram.
Remote Start/Stop Contacts
To remotely start and stop the chiller, dry contacts can
be wired in series with the flow switch and XTBC1 ‑
Terminals 13 to 14. Refer to Fig 4, 10 and unit wiring
diagram.
Remote Emergency Cutoff
Immediate shutdown of the chiller can be accomplished
by opening a field-installed dry contact to break the
electrical circuit between Terminals 5 to L on Terminal
Block XTBC2. The unit is shipped with a factory jumper
installed between Terminals 5 to L, which must be
removed if emergency shutdown contacts are installed.
Refer to Fig. 10 and unit wiring diagram.
Remote Temp Reset Input
The Remote Temp Reset input allows reset of the chilled
liquid set­point by supplying a voltage or current signal
field wiring should be connected to XTBC1 – Terminals
A+ to A-. A detailed explanation is provided in the “Unit
Controls” section of this IOM. Refer to Fig’s. 3, 4 and
unit wiring diagram.
When using the Load Limit feature,
the PWM feature will not function –
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATION OF
LOAD LIMITING AND TEM­
PERATURE RESET (PWM INPUT)
CANNOT BE DONE.
Flow Switch Input
The flow switch is field wired to XTBC1 Terminals 13
‑ 14. See Fig. 4 and unit wiring diagram.
COMPRESSOR HEATERS
Compressor heaters are standard. ZP103, ZP120
& ZP137 compressors utilize 90W heaters; ZP180
compressors utilize 70W heaters; ZP235 compressors
utilize 120W heaters. If power is OFF more than two
hours, the crankcase heaters must be energized for 18 –
24 hours prior to restarting a compressor. This will assure
that liquid slugging and oil dilution does not damage the
compressors on start.
RELIEF VALVES
Relief valves are located on both the high and low
pressure side of the piping. High side relief valve
pressure setting is 650 PSIG. Low side relief valve
pressure setting is 450 PSIG.
HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT
A high pressure cutout is installed in the discharge piping
of each system. The cutout opens at 585 PSIG ± 10
PSIG and closes at 440 PSIG ± 25 PSIG.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
41
4
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
SINGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION – TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED
DISCONNECT SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER
Power Panel
Control Panel
14
13 XTBC1
Terminal Block,
NF Disconnect SW
or Circuit Breaker
MICROPANEL
Flow Switch
GRD
1L1 1L2 1L3
L 2
XTBC2
See electrical note 9
Field
Provided
Unit Power
Supply
Field Provided 120-1-60
Micropanel Power Supply if
Control Transformer not supplied.
Field supplied control power wiring
must be run in separate grounded
conduit. Never run control wiring
in the same conduit with power
wiring.
LD13141
Electrical Notes and Legend located on page 53.
FIG. 9 – SINGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION – TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH
OR CIRCUIT BREAKER
It is possible that multiple sources
of power can be supplying the unit
power panel. To prevent serious
injury or death, the technician
should verify that NO LETHAL
VOLTAGES are present inside the
panel AFTER disconnecting power,
PRIOR to working on equipment.
42
The unit evaporator heater uses
120VAC. Disconnecting 120VAC
power from the unit, at or below freezing temperatures, can result in damage to the evaporator and unit as a
result of the chilled liquid freezing.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
USER CONTROL WIRING INPUTS
AA+
14
13
50
13
21
13
20
13
19
13
18
13
51
13
INTERNAL WIRING TO OPTIONAL REMOTE TEMP. RESET BOARD
FLOW SWITCH
4
REMOTE UNLOAD STEP 1
PWM REMOTE TEMP RESET
INTERNAL WIRING TO 2-KCR CONTROL RELAY
INTERNAL WIRING TO 1-KCR CONTROL RELAY
REMOTE START / STOP
XTBC1
LD13130
FIG. 10 – CONTROL WIRING INPUTS
All externally supplied contacts must
be capable of switching 24 VDC / 115
VAC. Gold contacts are recommended.
If supplied contacts are from a Relay
/ Contactor (Inductive Load), the coil
of the Relay / Contactor must be suppressed. Typical suppressor is P/N
031-00808-000.
The unit evaporator heater uses
120VAC. Disconnecting 120VAC
power from the unit, at or below freezing temperatures, can result in damage
to the evaporator and unit as a result
of the chilled liquid freezing.
It is possible that multiple sources of
power can be supplying the unit power
panel. To prevent serious injury or
death, the technician should verify
that NO LETHAL VOLTAGES are
present inside the panel AFTER disconnecting power, PRIOR to working
on equipment.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
43
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
USER CONTROL WIRING OUTPUTS
Normally jumpered.
Can be used as
EMERGENCY STOP
contacts from an
external source.
140
123
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
5
L
2
2
2
GND
INTERNAL WIRING TO EVAPORATOR HEATER
INTERNAL WIRING TO HOT GAS SOLENOID VALVE
SYSTEM 2 ALARM DRY CONTACTS (OPEN = ALARM)
SYSTEM 1 ALARM DRY CONTACTS (OPEN = ALARM)
SYSTEM 2 RUN DRY CONTACTS (CLOSE = RUN)
SYSTEM 1 RUN DRY CONTACTS (CLOSE = RUN)
EVAPORATOR PUMP DRY CONTACTS (CLOSE = RUN
BASED ON DAILY SCHEDULE)
INTERNAL 120 VAC WIRING TO F1 FUSE
INTERNAL 120 VAC WIRING (TYPICALLY FROM CONTROL TRANSFORMER)
INTERNAL NEUTRAL WIRING
INTERNAL NEUTRAL WIRING (TYPICALLY FROM CONTROL TRANSFORMER)
INTERNAL NEUTRAL WIRING
XTBC2
LD13242
FIG. 11 – CONTROL WIRING OUTPUTS
All chiller supplied contacts are rated
at 115 VAC, 100 VA, resistive load only,
and must be suppressed at the load
by user if powering an inductive load
(Relay / Contactor Coil). Typical suppressor P/N is 031-00808-000.
It is possible that multiple sources of
power can be supplying the unit power
panel. To prevent serious injury or
death, the technician should verify
that NO LETHAL VOLTAGES are
present inside the panel AFTER disconnecting power, PRIOR to working
on equipment.
The unit evaporator heater uses
120VAC. Disconnecting 120VAC
power from the unit, at or below freezing temperatures, can result in damage
to the evaporator and unit as a result
of the chilled liquid freezing.
44
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS (ENGLISH)
TABLE 1 – TEMPERATURES AND FLOWS
Nominal Evaporator Water Flow
Unit Designation
Temperature (°F)
Water Flow (gpm)
Air On Condenser (°F)
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
YLAA0285SE
40
55
100
355
0
125
YLAA0320SE
40
55
100
385
0
125
YLAA0360SE
40
55
100
385
0
125
YLAA0400SE
40
55
120
625
0
125
YLAA0435SE
40
55
120
625
0
125
YLAA0485SE
40
55
150
625
0
125
High Efficiency
YLAA0195HE
40
55
100
355
0
125
YLAA0220HE
40
55
100
355
0
125
YLAA0260HE
40
55
100
385
0
125
YLAA0300HE
40
55
100
385
0
125
YLAA0350HE
40
55
120
625
0
125
YLAA0390HE
40
55
180
650
0
125
YLAA0440HE
40
55
150
625
0
125
YLAA0445HE
40
55
120
625
0
125
YLAA0515HE
40
55
180
650
0
125
5
NOTES:
1. For leaving brine temperature below 4°C (40°F), contact your nearest Johnson Controls Office for application requirements.
2. For leaving water temperature higher than 13°C (55°F), contact the nearest Johnson Controls Office for application guidelines.
3. The evaporator is protected against freezing to -29°C (-20°F) with an electric heater as standard.
4. For operation at temperatures below -4°C (25°F), the optional Low Ambient Kit will need to be installed on the system.
5. For operation at temperatures above 46°C (115°F), the optional High Ambient Kit will need to be installed on the system.
Excessive flow will cause damage to
the cooler. Do not exceed max. cooler
flow. Special care should be taken
when multiple chillers are fed by a
single pump.
VOLTAGE LIMITATIONS
The following voltage limitations are absolute and
operation beyond these limitations may cause serious
damage to the compressor.
TABLE 2 – VOLTAGE LIMITATIONS
JOHNSON CONTROLS
UNIT POWER
MIN.
MAX.
200-3-60
180
220
230-3-60
207
253
380-3-60
355
415
460-3-60
414
506
575-3-60
517
633
45
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
HEAT EXCHANGER FLOW, GPM
Y L AA E v a p o ra to r P re s s u re D ro p (S I U n its )
1000
P re s s u re D ro p (k P a )
D
A
100
E
B
10
C
1
1
10
W a te r F lo w R a te (l/s )
100
CURVE
MODEL YLAA
A
240SE, 195HE, 220HE
B
320SE, 360SE, 260HE, 300HE
C
400SE, 435SE, 350HE, 455HE
D
485SE, 440HE
E
390HE, 515HE
TABLE 3 – ETHYLENE & PROPYLENE GLYCOL CORRECTION FACTORS
PROPYLENE GLYCOL
ETHYLENE GLYCOL
% WEIGHT
TONS
kW
COMPR
GPM°F/
TON
10
0.985
0.997
24.1
20
0.981
0.996
24.9
% WEIGHT
TONS
kW
COMPR
GPM°F/
TON
PRESS
DROP
FREEZE PT
26
10
0.983
0.996
24.2
1.048
27
16
20
0.974
0.995
24.4
1.086
19
0.961
0.990
25.1
1.134
8
PRESS
FREEZE PT
DROP
1.034
1.062
30
0.974
0.995
26.1
1.096
5
30
40
0.966
0.991
27.5
1.134
-10
40
0.946
0.98
26.0
1.186
-5
-32
50
0.928
0.984
27.2
1.247
-25
50
0.957
0.989
29.1
1.172
Note: Water Pressure Drop Curves may extend past the minimum and maximum water flow ranges.
46
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH)
STANDARD EFFICIENCY YLAA0285 - YLAA0485
50Hz
TABLE 4 – PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH)
Refrigerant R-410A
STANDARD EFFICIENCY UNITS
General Unit Data YLAA
0285
0320
0360
0400
0435
0485
Nominal Kw, R-410A
276
310
344
386
418
466
Length (mm)
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Number of Refrigerant Circuits
Refrigerant Charge, Operating
R-410A, ckt1 / ckt2, KG
2949
2235
2393
2
2949
2235
2393
2
3690
2242
2393
3690
2242
2393
3690
2242
2393
3690
2242
2393
2
2
2
2
24/24
26/26
28 / 26
35 / 29
35 / 33
32 / 33
Oil Charge, ckt1 / ckt2, LITERS
Shipping Weight
Operating Weight
Compressors, scroll type
Compressors per circuit
Compressors per unit
Condenser
Total Face Area M2
Number of Rows
Condenser Fans, Low Sound
Number of Fans, ckt1./ckt2.
Fan hp
Fan RPM
Total Chiller m3/sec
Evaporator
Water Volume, liters
Maximum Water Side Pressure,
bar
Maximum Refrigerant Side
Pressure, bar
Water Connections Size, inch
JOHNSON CONTROLS
12.6 / 10.4 12.6 / 12.6 18.9 / 12.4 18.9 / 12.6 18.9 / 20.4 18.9 / 18.9
2183
2367
2274
2469
2630
2824
2701
2908
2900
3107
3042
3290
2/2
4
2/2
4
3/3
3/2
3/3
3/3
6
5
6
6
10.0
1
10.0
1
12.6
12.6
15.0
15.0
1
1
1
1
2/2
2
2/2
2
3/2
3/2
3/3
3/3
2
2
2
2
950
950
950
950
950
950
26
26
32.5
32.5
39
39
184
195
193
208
208
250
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
31
31
31
31
31
31
6
6
6
8
8
8
47
5
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH)
HIGH EFFICIENCY YLAA0195 - YLAA0515
50Hz
TABLE 4A – PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH)
Refrigerant R-410A
HIGH EFFICIENCY UNITS
General Unit Data YLAA
0195
0220
0260
0300
0350
0390
0440
0455
0515
Nominal Kw, R-410A
191
213
253
310
346
386
429
451
521
Length (mm)
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Number of Refrigerant Circuits
Refrigerant Charge, Operating
R-410A, ckt1 / ckt2, KG
2949
2235
2393
2
2949
2235
2393
2
2949
2235
2393
2
3690
2242
2393
3690
2242
2393
3690
2242
2393
4807
2242
2393
4807
2242
2393
4807
2242
2393
2
2
2
2
2
2
22 / 13
12.4 /
6.5
1921
2106
22/22
10.4 /
8.3
2042
2227
26/26
10.4 /
10.4
2134
2328
28 / 26
29 / 30
40 / 34
36 / 32
37 / 35
40 / 41
12.6 /
10.4
12.6 /
12.6
18.9 /
10.4
18.9 /
12.6
18.9 /
20.4
18.9 /
18.9
2416
2610
2598
2805
2859
3151
3171
3421
3281
3489
3488
3779
3/2
5
2/2
4
2/2
4
2/2
2/2
3/2
3/2
3/3
3/3
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
7.5
1
10.0
1
10.0
1
12.6
15.1
15.1
17.6
20.1
20.1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2/2
2 / .5
950 /
850
19
2/2
2
2/2
2
3/2
3/3
3/3
4/3
4/4
4/4
2
2
2
2
2
2
950
950
950
950
950
950
950
950
26
26
32.5
39
39
45.5
52
52
185
185
194
193
208
293
250
208
293
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
43
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
3
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
Oil Charge, ckt1 / ckt2, LITERS
Shipping Weight
Operating Weight
Compressors, scroll type
Compressors per circuit
Compressors per unit
Condenser
Total Face Area M2
Number of Rows
Condenser Fans, Low Sound
Number of Fans, ckt1./ckt2.
Fan hp
Fan RPM
Total Chiller m3/sec
Evaporator
Water Volume, liters
Maximum Water Side Pressure,
bar
Maximum Refrigerant Side
Pressure, bar
Water Connections Size, inch
48
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ELECTRICAL INFORMATION
TABLE 5 – MICROPANEL POWER SUPPLY
UNIT VOLTAGE
MODELS w/o
CONTROL
TRANS
MODELS w/
CONTROL
TRANS
UNIT
VOLTAGE
CONTROL
POWER
MCA
NOTE A
115-1-60/50
OVER CURRENT PROTECTION,
SEE NOTE B
NF DISC Sw
MIN
MAX
15A
10A
15A
30 A / 240V
-17
200-1-60
15A
10A
15A
30 A / 240V
-28
230-1-60
15A
10A
15A
30 A / 240V
-40
380-1-60
15A
10A
15A
30 A / 480V
-46
460-1-60
15A
10A
15A
30 A / 480V
-50
380/415-1-60
15A
10A
15A
30A / 415V
-58
575-1-60
15A
10A
15A
30 A / 600V
A. Minimum #14 AWG, 75 °C, Copper Recommended
B. Minimum and Maximum Over Current Protection, Dual Element Fuse or Circuit Breaker
It is possible that multiple sources of
power can be supplying the unit power
panel. To prevent serious injury or
death, the technician should verify
that NO LETHAL VOLTAGES are
present inside the panel AFTER disconnecting power, PRIOR to working
on equipment.
The unit evaporator heater uses
120VAC. Disconnecting 120VAC
power from the unit, at or below freezing temperatures, can result in damage
to the evaporator and unit as a result
of the chilled liquid freezing.
TABLE 6 – VOLTAGE RANGE
VOLTAGE CODE
-17
-28
-40
-46
-50
-58
JOHNSON CONTROLS
VOLTAGE RANGE
UNIT POWER
200-3-60
230-3-60
380/415-3-60
460-3-60
380/415-3-50
575-3-60
MIN.
180
207
342
414
342
517
MAX.
220
253
440
506
440
633
49
5
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ELECTRICAL NOTES
NOTES:
1. Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) is based on 125% of the rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% of
the rated load amps for all other loads included in the circuit, per N.E.C. Article 430‑24. If the optional Factory
Mounted Control Transformer is provided, add the following MCA values to the electrical tables for the system
providing power to the transformer: ‑17, add 2.5 amps; ‑28, add 2.3 amps; ‑40, add 1.5 amps, ‑46, add 1.3 amps;
‑58, add 1 amps.
2. The minimum recommended disconnect switch is based on 115% of the rated load amps for all loads included
in the circuit, per N.E.C. Article 440.
3. Minimum fuse size is based upon 150% of the rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated load
amps for all other loads included in the circuit to avoid nuisance trips at start‑up due to lock rotor amps. It is not
recommended in applications where brown outs, frequent starting and stopping of the unit, and/or operation at
ambient temperatures in excess of 95ºF (35ºC) is anticipated.
4. Maximum fuse size is based upon 225% of the rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated
load amps for all other loads included in the circuit, per N.E.C. Article 440-22.
5. Circuit breakers must be UL listed and CSA certified and maximum size is based on 225% of the rated load
amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated load amps for all other loads included in the circuit. Otherwise,
HACR‑type circuit breakers must be used. Maximum HACR circuit breaker rating is based on 225% of the rated
load amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated load amps for all other loads included in the circuit.
6. The “INCOMING WIRE RANGE" is the minimum and maximum wire size that can be accommodated by the
unit wiring lugs. The (2) preceding the wire range indicates the number of termination points available per phase
of the wire range specified. Actual wire size and number of wires per phase must be determined based on the
National Electrical Code, using copper connectors only. Field wiring must also comply with local codes.
7. A ground lug is provided for each compressor system to accommodate a field grounding conductor per N.E.C.
Table 250‑95. A control circuit grounding lug is also supplied.
8. The supplied disconnect is a “Disconnecting Means” as defined in the N.E.C. 100, and is intended for isolating the
unit for the available power supply to perform maintenance and troubleshooting. This disconnect is not intended
to be a Load Break Device.
9. Field Wiring by others which complies to the National Electrical Code & Local Codes.
LEGEND
VOLTAGE CODE
ACR-LINE
ACROSS THE LINE START
C.B.
CIRCUIT BREAKER
-50 = 380/415-3-50
D.E.
DUAL ELEMENT FUSE
DISC SW
DISCONNECT SWITCH
FACT MOUNT CB
FACTORY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKER
FLA
FULL LOAD AMPS
HZHERTZ
MAXMAXIMUM
MCA
MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY
MIN
MINIMUM MIN NF
MINIMUM NON FUSED RLA
RATED LOAD AMPS
S.P. WIRE
SINGLE POINT WIRING
UNIT MTD SERV SW UNIT MOUNTED SERVICE (NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH)
LRA
LOCKED ROTOR AMPS
50
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ELECTRICAL DATA
Dual Point Data
Single Point Data
CHILLER
MODEL
VOLT
HZ
MINIMUM
MIN N/F
CIRCUIT
DISC SW
AMPS
System 2
System 1
MAX
MIN DUAL
MAX DUAL MINIMUM
DUAL
MIN DUAL
ELEM
MIN N/F
ELEM FUSE CIRCUIT
ELEM FUSE ELEM
FUSE &
DISC SW
& MAX CB AMPS
& MIN CB FUSE &
MIN CB
MAX CB
MINIMUM
MIN N/F
CIRCUIT
DISC SW
AMPS
MIN DUAL MAX DUAL
ELEM
ELEM
FUSE & FUSE &
MAX CB
MIN CB
YLAA0285SE
400
50
218
250
250
250
131
150
150
175
101
150
125
150
YLAA0320SE
400
50
248
400
300
300
131
150
150
175
131
150
150
175
YLAA0360SE
400
50
272
400
300
300
189
250
225
225
90
100
100
110
YLAA0400SE
400
50
306
400
350
350
189
250
225
225
131
150
150
175
YLAA0435SE
400
50
327
400
350
350
189
250
225
225
148
200
175
175
YLAA0485SE
400
50
365
600
400
400
189
250
225
225
189
250
225
225
YLAA0195HE
400
50
136
150
150
150
90
100
100
110
52
60
60
70
YLAA0220HE
400
50
159
200
175
200
101
150
125
150
64
100
80
80
YLAA0260HE
400
50
189
250
225
225
101
150
125
150
101
150
125
150
YLAA0300HE
400
50
222
250
250
250
135
150
150
175
101
150
125
150
YLAA0350HE
400
50
256
400
300
300
135
150
150
175
135
150
150
175
YLAA0390HE
400
50
281
400
300
300
193
250
225
225
101
150
125
150
YLAA0440HE
400
50
314
400
350
350
193
250
225
225
135
150
150
175
YLAA0455HE
400
50
335
400
350
350
193
250
225
225
152
200
175
175
YLAA0515HE
400
50
373
600
400
400
193
250
225
225
193
250
225
225
Electrical Data
SYSTEM #2
SYSTEM #1
CHILLER
MODEL
COMPR 1
VOLT
COMPR 2
COMPR 3
COMPR 1
COMPR 2
COMPR 3
Sys 1
Sys 2
COND FANS
COND FANS
HZ
RLA
LRA
RLA
LRA
RLA
LRA
RLA
LRA
RLA
LRA
RLA
LRA
QTY
FLA
LRA
QTY
FLA
LRA
N/A
N/A
54.5
310
25.1
198
N/A
N/A
2
4
19
2
4
19
YLAA0285SE
400
50
54.5
310
54.5
310
YLAA0320SE
400
50
54.5
310
54.5
310
N/A
N/A
54.5
310
54.5
310
N/A
N/A
2
4
19
2
4
19
YLAA0360SE
400
50
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
25.1
198
25.1
198
25.1
198
3
4
19
2
4
19
YLAA0400SE
400
50
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
N/A
N/A
3
4
19
2
4
19
YLAA0435SE
400
50
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
41.9
272
41.9
272
41.9
272
3
4
19
3
4
19
YLAA0485SE
400
50
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
3
4
19
3
4
19
YLAA0195HE
400
50
25.1
198
25.1
198
25.1
198
21.8
140
21.8
140
N/A
N/A
2
4
19
2
1.4
3.4
YLAA0220HE
400
50
54.5
310
25.1
198
N/A
N/A
25.1
198
25.1
198
N/A
N/A
2
4
19
2
4
19
YLAA0260HE
400
50
54.5
310
25.1
198
N/A
N/A
54.5
310
25.1
198
N/A
N/A
2
4
19
2
4
19
YLAA0300HE
400
50
54.5
310
54.5
310
N/A
N/A
54.5
310
25.1
198
N/A
N/A
3
4
19
2
4
19
YLAA0350HE
400
50
54.5
310
54.5
310
N/A
N/A
54.5
310
54.5
310
N/A
N/A
3
4
19
3
4
19
YLAA0390HE
400
50
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
25.1
198
N/A
N/A
4
4
19
2
4
19
YLAA0440HE
400
50
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
N/A
N/A
4
4
19
3
4
19
YLAA0455HE
400
50
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
41.9
272
41.9
272
41.9
272
4
4
19
4
4
19
YLAA0515HE
400
50
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
54.5
310
4
4
19
4
4
19
JOHNSON CONTROLS
51
5
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
WIRING LUGS
Lugs
CHILLER
MODEL
VOLT
HZ
ETL TB
1xx
ETL NFDS
2xx
ETL CB
3xx
ETL NFDS w/ Individual
System CBs
4xx
ETL Dual Pt
CB per Sys
5xx
CE
NFDS
W/ MMS
YLAA0285SE
400
50
(1) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
N/A
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0320SE
400
50
(1) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
N/A
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0360SE
400
50
(1) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
N/A
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0400SE
400
50
(1) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
N/A
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0435SE
400
50
(2) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
N/A
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0485SE
400
50
(2) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(2) 250 - 500 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) 250 - 500 kCMIL
N/A
(2) 250 - 500 kCMIL
YLAA0195HE
400
50
(1) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
N/A
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
YLAA0220HE
400
50
(1) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
N/A
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
YLAA0260HE
400
50
(1) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
N/A
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
YLAA0300HE
400
50
(1) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
N/A
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0350HE
400
50
(1) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(1) 250 - 500 kCMIL
& (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
N/A
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0390HE
400
50
(1) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
N/A
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0440HE
400
50
(2) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
N/A
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0455HE
400
50
(2) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(2) 250 - 500 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) 250 - 500 kCMIL
N/A
(2) 250 - 500 kCMIL
YLAA0515HE
400
50
(2) #4 - 500 kCMIL
(2) 250 - 500 kCMIL
(2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(2) 250 - 500 kCMIL
N/A
(2) 250 - 500 kCMIL
52
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND
035-21966-101 REV G
Des ignation
A CC
DESCRIPTION
A CCESSORY
- ADIS
- A MB
DISPLAY BOARD
MICRO BOA RD
- BAMB
A MBIENT
-BDA T
DISCHA RGE AIR TEMPERATURE
- BDP
DISCHA RGE PRESSURE
Des ignation DESCRIPTION
-QCB
-QMMSC
- QMMSP
-QSD
R
RED
CIRCUIT BREAKER
MANUA L MOTOR STA RTER COMPRESSOR
MA NUA L MOTOR STA RTER PUMP
SWITCH DISCONNECT
RESISTOR
RED
- BECT
ENTERING CHILLED TEMPERATURE
RP
RUN PERMISSIV E
- BLCT
LEAV ING CHILLED TEMPERATURE
RU
REMOTE UNLOAD Ist STEP
NOT FITTED ON REMOTE EV AP. UNITS
SCH
MOTOR PROTECTOR COMPRESSOR
SCR
SCREEN
- BSP
SUCTION PRESSURE
- SF
FLOW SWITCH
-CPF
CAPACITOR POWER FA CTOR
- SKP
KEYPAD
- SOA
SWITCH OFF A UTO
-SZT
ZONE THERMOSTAT
- ECH
CRA NKCASE HEATER
-EEH
EVA PORATOR HEA TER
-T
TRANSFORMER
HEA T RECOV ERY HEA TER
- TC
TRA NSFORMER CURRENT
- EHRH
-EPH
PUMP HEATER
-EXT
EXTERNA L TO CONTROL PANEL
-UBR
FUSE
-WHT
-F
- FHP
HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT
-FSC
FAN SPEED CONTROLLER
FAN SPEED INHIBIT TWO SPEED
FAN OPTION ONLY
-FSI
GND
G/Y
J
-K
-KF
-KFH
GROUND
PLUG BOA RD CONNECTOR
-KT
-M
COMPRESSOR MOTOR
-MF
-MP
MOTOR FAN
MOTOR PUMP
-KFOL
-KFS
-KH
-KM
-KCR
-KP
NU
PE
PWM
- XP
5
BRIDGE RECTIFIER
WHITE
- XTBC
PLUGS BETWEEN POW./MICRO. SECTION
TERMINA L BLOCK CUSTOMER
- XTBF
TERMINA L BLOCK FACTORY
-YESV
EV APORATOR SOLENOID V ALVE
-YHGSV
GREEN / YELLOW
CIRCUIT BOA RD RELA Y
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR)
FAN CONTACTOR HIGH SPEED
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR)
FAN CONTACTOR LOW SPEED
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR)
FAN OVERLOAD
RELA Y FA N SPEED
HEATER RELAY
COMPRESSOR CONTA CTOR
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR)
CONTROL RELAY
PUMP CONTA CTOR PA RT
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR)
RELA Y TIMER
-KFL
JOHNSON CONTROLS
THERMOSTA T CRANKCASE HEATER
-BMP
- Y LLSV
- Z CPR
NB
HOT GAS SOLENOID V ALVE
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR)
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID V ALVE
FIELD MOUNTED A ND WIRED ON REMOTE
EV AP. UNIT
COMPRESSOR
NOTE WELL {SEE NOTE}
WIRING AND ITEMS SHOWN THUS
ARE STANDARD Y ORK ACCESSORIES
WIRING AND ITEMS SHOWN THUS
ARE NOT SUPPLIED BY Y ORK
ITEMS THUS ENCLOSED FORM A
COMPONENTS OR SETS OFCOMPONENTS
NOT USED
PROTECTIV E EARTH
PULSE WIDTH MODULATION TEMP
RESET or REMOTE UNLOAD 2nd STEP
035-21966-101 REV G
53
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND (CONTINUED)
035-21966-101 REV G
GENERAL
A.
This drawing is based on IEC symbols.
B.
Field wiring to be in accordance with the relevant electrical code as well as all other applicable codes and specifications.
C.
All sources of supply shown on this diagram to be taken from one main isolator, not shown or supplied by YORK.
D.
E.
Green and yellow wire is used for earth, multi-colored cable used for low voltage. Red wire used for AC Control, blue wire for neutral,
black wire for AC and DC power. Orange wire should be used for interlock control wiring supplied by external source.
Legend designation depicts component abbreviations. Number prefix located, if applicable, on schematic circuit, refers to system
thereon, E.G. = 1-FHP2 refers to high pressure cutout no 2 on system no 1.
All wiring to control section voltage free contacts requires a supply provided by the customer maximum voltage 120 volts. The
customer must take particular care when deriving the supplies for the voltage free terminals with regard to a common point of
F.
isolation. Thus, these circuits when used must be fed via the common point of isolation the voltage to these circuits is removed when
the common point of isolation to the unit is opened. This common point of isolation is not supplied by YORK. The YORK voltage free
contacts are rated at 100va. All inductive devices {relays} switch by the YORK voltage free contacts must have their coil suppressed
using standard R/C suppressors.
G.
Customer voltage free contacts connected to terminal 13 must be rated at 30V 5ma.
No controls {relays etc.} Should be mounted in any section of the control panel. Additionally, control wiring not connected to
H.
the YORK control panel should not be run through the panel. If these precautions are not followed, electrical noise could cause
malfunctions or damage to the unit and its controls.
I.
120/14.3 - (Signal IN/OUT) i.e. 120 is wire # and 14.3 refers to SHT. 14 column 3.
NOTES
1
2
Refer to installation commissioning operation and maintenance manual for customer connections and customer connection notes,
non compliance to these instructions will invalidate unit warranty.
Wiring and components for compressor 3 only fitted when unit has 3 compressors on the system. 1-BMP3 is replaced by a link
across terminals 134 & 135. 2-BMP3 is replaced by a link across terminals 234 & 235.
3
4
Fitted on units with hot gas bypass option.
5
EMS option is wired as shown.
6
This wiring must be used for old display 031-0110-000.
7
Network connection point.
8
Printer port.
9
Remote emergency stop can be wired between terminal l and 5 after removing link.
10
Power factor correction accessory. Power factor correction fitted to each compressor contactor.
11
system 2 terminals 232 & 233, 233 & 234 and 234 & 235 are linked.
12
Only fitted on systems with 3 or 4 fans.
13
Only fitted on systems with 4 fans.
14
Only fitted on systems with 5 fans.
15
Only fitted on systems with 6 fans.
16
Input switch disconnect (standard on CE units) or circuit breaker option replaces input terminal block.
17
Input switch disconnect & individual system circuit breaker option replaces input terminal block.
18
115V control circuit requires a 115V supply unless control circuit transformer -T2 & -F3 are fitted (standard on CE units).
19
20
54
Not fitted on compressors with internal motor protection. For system 1 terminals 132 & 133, 133 & 134 and 134 & 135 are linked. For
For optional hydro kit. Heater -EPH is fitted and wired as shown. On single pump -KP1, -QMMSP1 & -MP1 are fitted & wired as
shown. On two pump hydro kits -KP2, -QMMSP2 & -MP2 are also fitted and wired as shown.
Current measurement option wired as show.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND (CONTINUED)
21
Only fitted on systems with single speed fans.
22
Only fitted on systems with two speed fans.
23
Optional compressor manual motors starters (standard on CE units).
24
See sheet 3 of connection diagram for power input options.
25
Alternate connections shown for different two speed motor types.
26
Only fitted on systems with a maximum of 4 fans.
27
220/230V units require a separate fuse for units w/4 or more fans per system.
28
Low ambient kit -FSC for fan -MF1 is only fitted on systems with less than 4 fans.
29
Only fitted on YLAA0350.
30
Only fitted on YLAA0195 & 0350.
31
Input dual point circuit breaker option replaces input terminal block.
32
Field installed on remote evaporator units.
33
Fitted on units with single phase motors only.
34
Fitted on units with low ambient option only.
35
Only fitted on units with an acoustic kit.
36
Only fitted on heat recovery units.
37
Only fitted on condensing units.
38
Omitted on condensing units.
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
55
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
WIRING DIAGRAMS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21583-201 REV D
FIG. 12 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 1
56
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
57
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21583-202 REV D
FIG. 13 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 2
58
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
59
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21583-203 REV D
FIG. 14 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 3
60
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
61
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21583-204 REV D
FIG. 15 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 4
62
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
63
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21583-205 REV D
FIG. 16 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 5
64
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
65
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21583-206 REV D
FIG. 17 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 6
66
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
67
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21583-207 REV D
FIG. 18 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 7
68
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
69
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21583-208 REV D
FIG. 19 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 8
70
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
71
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21583-209 REV D
FIG. 20 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 9
72
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
73
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21589-201 REV D
FIG. 21 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 1
74
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
75
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21589-202 REV D
FIG. 22 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 2
76
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
77
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21589-203 REV D
FIG. 23 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 3
78
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
79
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21589-204 REV D
FIG. 24 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 4
80
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
81
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21589-205 REV D
FIG. 25 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 5
82
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
83
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21589-206 REV D
FIG. 26 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 6
84
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
85
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21589-207 REV D
FIG. 27 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 7
86
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
87
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515
035-21583-101
REVBD
035-21583-101 REV
LD13143A
FIG. 28 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 1
88
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
LD13144A
JOHNSON CONTROLS
89
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515
035-21583-102 REVREV
D
035-21583-102
D
FIG. 29 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 2
90
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
91
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515
035-21583-103 REV B
FIG. 30 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 3
92
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
93
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515
035-21583-104 REV B
FIG. 31 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 4
94
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
95
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515
POWER PANEL
035-21589-101 REV C
035-21589-101 REV B
LD13235A
FIG. 32 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 1
96
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
LD13236A
JOHNSON CONTROLS
97
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515
MICROPANEL CONECTIONS
035-21589-102 REV D
035-21589-102 REV C
FIG. 33 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 2
98
LD13240A
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
LD13241A
JOHNSON CONTROLS
99
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515
POWER OPTIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM
035-21589-103
035-21589-103
REV REVB
B
LD13234A
FIG. 34 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 3
100
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
LD13901
JOHNSON CONTROLS
101
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515
COMPRESSOR WIRING
035-21589-106 REVC
035-21589-106 REV E
FIG. 35 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 6
102
LD13900
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
LD13233A
JOHNSON CONTROLS
103
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515
CONDENSER FAN MAPPING AND SEQUENCING
035-21589-107 REV A
LD13147
FIG. 36 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 7
104
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
LD13232
JOHNSON CONTROLS
105
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
WIRING DIAGRAM - POWER SUPPLY
SINGLE POINT WIRING OPTIONS
FIG. 37 – WIRING DIAGRAM, SINGLE POINT WIRING OPTIONS
106
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
DUAL PUMP WIRING
5
FIG. 38 – DUAL PUMP WIRING
JOHNSON CONTROLS
LD13237
107
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
WIRING
FIG. 39 – WIRING
108
LD13238
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
5
LD13239
JOHNSON CONTROLS
109
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
LAYOUT - POWER BLOCKS AND TRANSFORMERS
FIG. 40 – LAYOUT - POWER BLOCKS AND TRANSFORMERS
110
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH)
YLAA0195HE
5
2398
2251
1082
381
2242
822
NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions
(including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation
ensures rated performance, reliable operation, and ease
of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise
minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in
unpredictable airflow patterns and possible diminished
performance. Johnson Controls’s unit controls will
optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure
473
2159
2911
safety cutouts; however, the system designer must
consider potential performance degradation. Access to
the unit control center assumes the unit is no higher than
on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances:
Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end
wall – 4'0''; top – no obstructions allowed; distance
between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent
wall may be higher than the unit.
FIG. 41 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0195HE
JOHNSON CONTROLS
111
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS - YLAA0220HE, 0260HE, 0285SE, & 320SE (ENGLISH)
2391
2251
1082
381
2242
822
NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions
(including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation
ensures rated performance, reliable operation, and ease
of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise
minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in
unpredictable airflow patterns and possible diminished
performance. Johnson Controls’s unit controls will
optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure
457
2159
2911
safety cutouts; however, the system designer must
consider potential performance degradation. Access to
the unit control center assumes the unit is no higher than
on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances:
Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end
wall – 4'0''; top – no obstructions allowed; distance
between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent
wall may be higher than the unit.
FIG. 42 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0220HE, 0260HE, 0285SE, & 320SE
112
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS - YLAA0300HE,YLAA0360SE, YLAA0400SE (ENGLISH)
5/8" DIA MOUNTING
HOLES(TYP)
525
POWER ENTRY
8712 WIDE X 178 HIGH
2077
14012
VIEW B-B
BOTOM OF PANEL
79
28 (TYP)
ORIGIN
Y
CG
B
B
5
2977
193
TOP VIEW
X
2393
6"
(WATER
INLET)
6"
(WATER OUTLET)
1086
2X 381
780
TO CLR CONN
473
(2) RIGGING HOLES
EACH SIDE
2242 BASE WIDTH
2261
588
981
588
3613
RIGHT VIEW
FRONT VIEW
POWER: SINGLE POINT SUPPLY WITH TERMINAL BLOCK
NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions
(including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation
ensures rated performance, reliable operation, and ease
of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise
minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in
unpredictable airflow patterns and possible diminished
performance. Johnson Controls’s unit controls will
optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure
safety cutouts; however, the system designer must
consider potential performance degradation. Access to
the unit control center assumes the unit is no higher than
on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances:
Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end
wall – 4'0''; top – no obstructions allowed; distance
between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent
wall may be higher than the unit.
FIG. 43 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0300HE,YLAA0360SE, YLAA0400SE
JOHNSON CONTROLS
113
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS - YLAA0435SE (ENGLISH)
5/8" DIA MOUNTING
HOLES(TYP)
525
POWER ENTRY
8712 WIDE X 178 HIGH
14012
2077
BOTOM OF PANEL
VIEW B-B
81
28 (TYP)
ORIGIN
193
2977
TOP VIEW
Y
CG
X
2393
B
B
8"
(WATER
INLET)
8"
(WATER OUTLET)
1085
2X 414
498
588
749
TO CLR CONN
2242 BASE WIDTH
2261
FRONT VIEW
861
(2) RIGGING HOLES
EACH SIDE
1006
588
3613
RIGHT VIEW
POWER: SINGLE POINT SUPPLY WITH TERMINAL BLOCK
NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions
(including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation
ensures rated performance, reliable operation, and ease
of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise
minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in
unpredictable airflow patterns and possible diminished
performance. Johnson Controls’s unit controls will
optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure
safety cutouts; however, the system designer must
consider potential performance degradation. Access to
the unit control center assumes the unit is no higher than
on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances:
Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end
wall – 4'0''; top – no obstructions allowed; distance
between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent
wall may be higher than the unit.
FIG. 44 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0435SE (ENGLISH)
114
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS - YLAA0350HE (ENGLISH)
5/8" DIA MOUNTING
HOLES(TYP)
525
POWER ENTRY
8712 WIDE X 178 HIGH
14012
2077
VIEW B-B
BOTOM OF PANEL
81
28 (TYP)
5
ORIGIN
193
2977
TOP VIEW
Y
CG
B
B
X
2393
8"
(WATER
INLET)
8"
(WATER OUTLET)
1085
2X 414
861
749
TO CLR CONN
498
588
2242 BASE WIDTH
(2) RIGGING HOLES
EACH SIDE
1006
588
3613
2261
FRONT VIEW
RIGHT VIEW
POWER: SINGLE POINT SUPPLY WITH TERMINAL BLOCK
NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions
(including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation
ensures rated performance, reliable operation, and ease
of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise
minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in
unpredictable airflow patterns and possible diminished
performance. Johnson Controls’s unit controls will
optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure
safety cutouts; however, the system designer must
consider potential performance degradation. Access to
the unit control center assumes the unit is no higher than
on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances:
Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end
wall – 4'0''; top – no obstructions allowed; distance
between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent
wall may be higher than the unit.
FIG. 45 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0350HE (ENGLISH)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
115
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS - YLAA0390HE, YLAA0485SE (ENGLISH)
5/8" DIA MOUNTING
HOLES(TYP)
525
14012
POWER ENTRY
8712 WIDE X 178 HIGH
VIEW B-B
BOTOM OF PANEL
2077
81
28 (TYP)
ORIGIN
193
2977
TOP VIEW
Y
CG
X
2393
B
B
8"
(WATER
INLET)
8"
(WATER OUTLET)
1085
2X 438
749
TO CLR CONN
2242 BASE WIDTH
562
588
861
(2) RIGGING HOLES
EACH SIDE
460
588
3613
2261
FRONT VIEW
RIGHT VIEW
POWER: SINGLE POINT SUPPLY WITH TERMINAL BLOCK
NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions
(including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation
ensures rated performance, reliable operation, and ease
of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise
minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in
unpredictable airflow patterns and possible diminished
performance. Johnson Controls’s unit controls will
optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure
safety cutouts; however, the system designer must
consider potential performance degradation. Access to
the unit control center assumes the unit is no higher than
on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances:
Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end
wall – 4'0''; top – no obstructions allowed; distance
between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent
wall may be higher than the unit.
FIG. 46 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0390HE, YLAA0485SE
116
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS - YLAA0440HE (ENGLISH)
5/8" DIA MOUNTING
HOLES(TYP)
0
0
0
525
2077
14012
POWER ENTRY
8712 WIDE X 178 HIGH
VIEW B-B
79
BOTTOM OF PANEL
28 (TYP)
0
ORIGIN
193
Y
0
1753
5
2032
TOP VIEW
X
CG
8"
(WATER
INLET)
B
B
0
8"
(WATER
OUTLET)
2389
1086
2X 438
749
TO CLR CONN
562
588
2242 BASE WIDTH
2261
1578
(3) RIGGING HOLES
EACH SIDE
1473
1675
4731
RIGHT VIEW
FRONT VIEW
POWER: SINGLE POINT SUPPLY WITH TERMINAL BLOCK
NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions
(including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation
ensures rated performance, reliable operation, and ease
of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise
minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in
unpredictable airflow patterns and possible diminished
performance. Johnson Controls’s unit controls will
optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure
safety cutouts; however, the system designer must
consider potential performance degradation. Access to
the unit control center assumes the unit is no higher than
on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances:
Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end
wall – 4'0''; top – no obstructions allowed; distance
between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent
wall may be higher than the unit.
FIG. 47 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0440HE
JOHNSON CONTROLS
117
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS - YLAA0455HE (ENGLISH)
5/8" DIA MOUNTING
HOLES (TYP)
525
14012
POWER ENTRY
8712 WIDE X 178 HIGH
2077
VIEW B-B
BOTTOM OF PANEL
79
28 (TYP)
ORIGIN
193
1753
1918
Y
CG
B
B
TOP VIEW
X
8"
(WATER
INLET)
2389
1082
2X 410
774
TO CLR CONN
498
588
2242 BASE WIDTH
2261
FRONT VIEW
(3) RIGGING HOLES
EACH SIDE
2124
1473
1675
4731
FRONT VIEW
POWER: SINGLE POINT SUPPLY WITH TERMINAL BLOCK
NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions
(including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation
ensures rated performance, reliable operation, and ease
of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise
minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in
unpredictable airflow patterns and possible diminished
performance. Johnson Controls’s unit controls will
optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure
safety cutouts; however, the system designer must
consider potential performance degradation. Access to
the unit control center assumes the unit is no higher than
on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances:
Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end
wall – 4'0''; top – no obstructions allowed; distance
between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent
wall may be higher than the unit.
FIG. 48 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0455HE
118
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS - YLAA0515HE (ENGLISH)
5/8" DIA MOUNTING
HOLES (TYP)
525
POWER ENTRY
8712 WIDE X 178 HIGH
14012
VIEW B-B
2077
BOTTOM OF PANEL
28 (TYP)
79
5
ORIGIN
1753
193
1918
TOP VIEW
Y
CG
B
B
X
8"
(WATER
INLET)
8"
(WATER
OUTLET)
2389
1082
2X 438
774
TO CLR CONN
2242 BASE WIDTH
2261
FRONT VIEW
562
588
(3) RIGGING HOLES
EACH SIDE
1578
1473
1675
4731
POWER: SINGLE POINT SUPPLY WITH TERMINAL BLOCK
NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions
(including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation
ensures rated performance, reliable operation, and ease
of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise
minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in
unpredictable airflow patterns and possible diminished
performance. Johnson Controls’s unit controls will
optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure
FRONT VIEW
safety cutouts; however, the system designer must
consider potential performance degradation. Access to
the unit control center assumes the unit is no higher than
on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances:
Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end
wall – 4'0''; top – no obstructions allowed; distance
between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent
wall may be higher than the unit.
FIG. 49 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0515HE
JOHNSON CONTROLS
119
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
(2 m)
TECHNICAL DATA – CLEARANCES
(2 m)
(2 m)
(1.3 m)
LD13243
NOTES:
1. No obstructions allowed above the unit.
2. Only one adjacent wall may be higher than the unit.
3. Adjacent units should be 10 feet (3 Meters) apart.
FIG. 50 – UNIT CLEARANCES – ALL MODELS
120
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR MOUNTING POSITIONS
GENERAL
Whenever the isolator option is ordered, the isolators
will be shipped loose with the chiller. Use the drawings
that follow to select the appropriate chiller model and
weight by isolator location. Based on the weight by
X
CG
isolator location, select the appropriate isolator from the
isolators packaged with the chiller. The isolator capacity
ranges are provided in the information that follows based
on type of isolator being installed.
L1
L2
L3
R1
R2
R3
Y
YLAA0195HE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
1
2
3
L
706
534
N/A
R
527
398
N/A
YLAA0195HE Isolator Locations (mm)
1
2
3
L
(495, 2207)
(2641, 2207)
N/A
R
(495, 36)
(2461, 36)
N/A
YLAA0220HE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
1
2
3
L
712
576
N/A
R
519
398
N/A
YLAA0220HE Isolator Locations (mm)
1
2
3
L
(495, 2207)
(2641, 2207)
N/A
R
(495, 36)
(2461, 36)
N/A
YLAA0260HE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
1
2
3
L
742
620
N/A
R
526
439
N/A
YLAA0260HE Isolator Locations (mm)
1
2
3
L
(495, 2207)
(2641, 2207)
N/A
R
(495, 36)
(2461, 36)
N/A
YLAA0285SE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
1
2
3
L
782
626
N/A
R
533
427
N/A
YLAA0285SE Isolator Locations (mm)
1
2
3
L
(495, 2207)
(2641, 2207)
N/A
R
(495, 36)
(2461, 36)
N/A
YLAA0320SE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
1
2
3
L
803
679
N/A
R
534
452
N/A
YLAA0320SE Isolator Locations (mm)
1
2
3
L
(495, 2207)
(2641, 2207)
N/A
R
(495, 36)
(2461, 36)
N/A
FIG. 51 – WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR MOUNTING POSITIONS
JOHNSON CONTROLS
5
continued on next page
121
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
L1
L2
L3
R1
R2
R3
continued from previous page
X
CG
Y
YLAA0300HE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
YLAA0300HE Isolator Locations (mm)
1
2
3
1
2
3
L
933
811
N/A
L
(193, 2207)
(3170, 2207)
N/A
R
694
603
N/A
R
(193, 36)
(3170, 36)
N/A
YLAA0350HE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
YLAA0350HE Isolator Locations (mm)
1
2
3
1
2
3
L
862
789
N/A
L
(193, 2207)
(3170, 2207)
N/A
R
603
557
N/A
R
(193, 36)
(3170, 36)
N/A
YLAA0360SE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
YLAA0360SE Isolator Locations (mm)
1
2
3
1
2
3
L
1021
905
N/A
L
(193, 2207)
(3170, 2207)
N/A
R
704
624
N/A
R
(193, 36)
(3170, 36)
N/A
YLAA0390HE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
YLAA0390HE Isolator Locations (mm)
1
2
3
1
2
3
L
939
922
N/A
L
(193, 2207)
(3170, 2207)
N/A
R
650
639
N/A
R
(193, 36)
(3170, 36)
N/A
YLAA0400SE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
YLAA0400SE Isolator Locations (mm)
1
2
3
1
2
3
L
1050
931
N/A
L
(193, 2207)
(3170, 2207)
N/A
R
720
639
N/A
R
(193, 36)
(3170, 36)
N/A
YLAA0435SE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
YLAA0435SE Isolator Weights Locations (mm)
1
2
3
1
2
3
L
976
933
N/A
L
(193, 2207)
(3170, 2207)
N/A
R
613
586
N/A
R
(193, 36)
(3170, 36)
N/A
YLAA0485SE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
YLAA0485SE Isolator Weights Locations (mm)
1
2
3
1
2
3
L
1026
992
N/A
L
(193, 2207)
(3170, 2207)
N/A
R
647
625
N/A
R
(193, 36)
(3170, 36)
N/A
FIG. 51 – WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR MOUNTING POSITIONS
122
continued on next page
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
continued from previous page
X
CG
L1
L2
L3
R1
R2
R3
5
Y
YLAA0440HE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
1
2
3
L
664
987
576
R
479
592
535
YLAA0440HE Isolator Locations (mm)
1
2
3
L
(193, 2207)
(3170, 2207)
(3863, 2207)
R
(193, 36)
(3170, 36)
(3863, 36)
YLAA0455HE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
1
2
3
L
627
1085
595
R
454
609
533
YLAA0455HE Isolator Locations (mm)
1
2
3
L
(193, 2207)
(3170, 2207)
(3863, 2207)
R
(193, 36)
(3170, 36)
(3863, 36)
YLAA0515HE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected)
1
2
3
L
673
1154
641
R
503
647
574
YLAA0515HE Isolator Locations (mm)
1
2
3
L
(193, 2207)
(3170, 2207)
(3863, 2207)
R
(193, 36)
(3170, 36)
(3863, 36)
FIG. 51 – WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR MOUNTING POSITIONS
JOHNSON CONTROLS
123
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ISOLATOR DATA
ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE
CP
5/8"
Ø1/2"
H"
C"
T"
B"
L"
D"
W"
Mount
Type
LD13759A
Dimension Data (Inches)
W
D
L
B
C
T
H
CP1
3
5/8
7-3/4
6-1/2
4-3/4
1/2
5-5/8
CP2
3
5/8
10-1/2
9-1/4
7-3/4
9/16
6
MODEL NUMBER
COLOR CODE
CP-1D-510
BLACK
RATED CAPACITY (FOR UNITS WITH ALL
LOAD POINTS LESS THAN 1785 LBS (810 KG)
(LBS.)
(KG)
Up thru 434
Up thru 197
CP-1D-900
DARK GREEN
435 thru 765
198 thru 347
CP-1D-1200
GRAY
766 thru 1020
348 thru 463
CP-1D-1360
WHITE
1021 thru 1156
464 thru 524
CP-1D-1785N
GRAY/RED
1157 thru 1785
525 thru 810
MODEL NUMBER
COLOR CODE
C2P-1D-1350
C2P-1D-1350
RATED CAPACITY (FOR UNITS WITH ANY
LOAD POINT ABOVE 1518 LBS (689 KG)
(LBS.)
(KG)
DARK PURPLE
Up thru 1148
Up to 521
DARK PURPLE
Up thru 1148
Up to 521
C2P-1D-1800
DARK GREEN
1149 thru 1530
522 - 694
C2P-1D-2400
GRAY
1531 thru 2040
695 - 925
C2P-1D-2400
GRAY
1531 thru 2040
695 - 925
C2P-1D-2720
WHITE
2041 thru 2312
926 - 1049
C2P-1D-3570N
GRAY/RED
2313 thru 3570
1050 - 1619
FIG. 52 – ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE
124
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATORS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1. Read instructions in their entirety before beginning
installation.
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be
positioned in accordance with the submittal drawings or as otherwise reccomended.
3. Set isolators on floor, housekeeping pad or subbase, ensuring that all isolators centerlines match
the equipment mounting holes. The VMC group
reccomends that the isolator base (“B”) be installed
on a level surface. Shim or grout as required, leveling all isolatorbases to the same elevation (1/4-inch
maximum difference can be tolerated).
4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supprting structure
utilizing base slotted holes (“C”).
5. Place equipment on top of isolators making sure
that mounting holes of the equipment line up with
isolator positioning pin (“H”).
6. The adjustment process can only begin after the
equipment or machine is at its full operating
weight.
7. Adjust each isolator in sequence by turning spring
adjusting bolt (“D”) one full counterclockwise turn
at a time. Repeat this procedure on all isolators,
one at a time.
8. Continue adjusting each isolator until a minimum of
1/4" clearance is achieved between the lower housing and upper housing. (See drawing below).
9. Fine adjust isolators to level equipment.
10. Installation is complete.
5
LD13790
FIG. 53 – ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATORS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
JOHNSON CONTROLS
125
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
SEISMIC ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE
Y2RS
1-1/8"
5"
5/8"
2-3/4"
2-3/4"
12"
3/8" GAP
5/8-11UNC
TYP. (4)
Ø3/4"
TYP.(4)
3/4"
7/8"
14"
1/2" LIMIT
STOP &
NUT
8-3/8"
OPER.
HEIGHT
12-1/4"
3-1/2"
3/8"
5"
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, INTERPRET PER ANSI Y14.
2. STANDARD FINISH: HOUSING-POWDER COATED (COLOR:BLACK), SPRING-POWDER COATED (COLOR: SEE T
HARDWARE ZINC-ELECTROPLATE.
3. EQUIPMENT MUST BE BOLTED OR WELDED TO THE TOP PLATE TO MEET ALLOWABLE SEISMIC RATINGS.
4. ALL SPRINGS ARE DESIGNED FOR 50% OVERLOAD CAPACITY WITH EXCEPTION OF THE 2D-3280N & 2D-2870
NEXT PAGE
FOR
INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
5. REFER TO PAGE
FOR
INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS.
6. CONSULT FACTORY FOR CONCRETE INSTALLATION.
LD13761A
VMC PART NUMBER
VMC ISOL. COLOR
WEIGHT RANGE (LBS)
WEIGHT RANGE (KGS)
Y2RSI-2D-460
GREEN
Up thru 391
UP TO 177
Y2RSI-2D-460
GREEN
Up thru 391
UP TO 177
Y2RSI-2D-710
DARK BROWN
392 thru 604
178 - 274
Y2RSI-2D-870
RED
605 thru 740
275 - 336
Y2RSI-2D-1200N
RED/BLACK
741 thru 1020
337 - 463
Y2RSI-2D-1690
PINK
1021 thru 1437
464 - 652
Y2RSI-2D-2640N
PINK/GRAY
1438 thru 2244
653 - 1018
Y2RSI-2D-2870N
PINK/GRAY/ORANGE
2245 thru 2618
1019 - 1188
Y2RSI-2D-3280N
PINK/GRAY/DK.BROWN
2619 thru 3740
1189 - 1696
FIG. 54 – SEISMIC ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE
126
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
SEISMIC ISOLATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS
1. Read instructions in their entirety before beginning
installation.
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be
positioned in accordance with the submittal drawings or as otherwise recommended.
3. Set isolators on floor, housekeeping pad, or subbase, ensuring that all isolator centerlines match
the equipment mounting holes. The VMC group
recommends that the isolator base plates (“B”)
be installed on a level surface. Shim or grout as
required, leveling all isolator base plates to the
same elevation (1/4-inch maximum difference can
be tolerated).
4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supporting structure
utilizing base plate thru holes (“C”) or weld base
plate to supporting structure with 3/8 fillet weld
2" long @ 4" on center around entire base plate or
as engineered for specific load and or field conditions.
5. Isolators are shipped to the job site with (2) removable spacer shims (“E”) between the top plate and
the housing. These shims must be in place when
the equipment is positioned over the isolators.
6. With all shims (“E”) in place, position equipment
on top of plate (“A”) of isolator. Bolt equipment
securely to top plate of isolator using a minimum
of (2) 5/8 UNC A325 grade 5 SAE bolts or weld
("A")
("E")
CL
("G")
("E")
equipment or bracket to the top plate (“A”) of isolator with a minimum of 3/8 fillet welds 2" long @
3" on center for a minimum total weld of 10". (All
sides of equipment or bracket resting on top plate
(“A”) must be welded).
7. The adjustment process can only begin after the
equipment or machine is at its full operating
weight.
8. Back off each of the (4) limit stop lock nuts (“F”)
on isolators 1/2".
9. Adjust each isolator in sequence by turning spring
adjusting nuts (“G”) one full clockwise turn at a
time. Repeat this procedure on all isolators, one at
a time. Check the limit stop lock nuts (“F”) periodically to ensure that clearance between the washer
and rubber grommet is maintained. Stop adjustment
of isolator only when the top plate (“A”) has risen
just above the shim (“E”).
10. Remove all spacer shims (“E”).
11. Fine adjust isolators to level equipment.
12.Adjust all limit stop lock nuts (“F”) per isolator,
maintaining 1/4-to 3/8-inch gap. The limit stop
nuts must be kept at this gap to ensure uniform bolt
loading during uplift (as the case when equipment
is drained).
13. Installation is complete.
GROMMET
("A")
CL
1/4 - 3/8 GAP
WASHER
EQUIPMENT
("F")
("E")
("F")
("C")
("B")
("C")
LD13763B
FIG. 55 – SEISMIC ISOLATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS
JOHNSON CONTROLS
127
5
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
DURALENE ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE
RD-Style
Isolators
DW
CD
MOLDED
DURULENE
HF
ø AD THRU
TYP 2 PLACES
BT
AL
W
L
Notes:
1. All dimensions are inches, interpreted per ANSI Y14.
2. Refer
Refer to
tonext
Page
98 for installation
installationinstructions.
instructions.
page
3. Mount molded in weather resistant duralene compound as standard. Also available in other materials
such as natural rubber, extreme high temperature silicone, high-damped silicone, nitrile and EDPM.
4. AL = Mounting hole center to center spacing.
5. HF = Free height of mount, prior to loading. Operating height calculated by the free height less the
static deflection under load. All dimensions for reference only.
6. Hardware zinc-electroplated.
DIMENSION DATA (INCHES)
MOUNT
TYPE
L
W
HF
AL
AD
BT
RD1-WR
3.13
1.75
1.25
2.38
0.34
0.19
RD2-WR
3.88
2.38
1.75
3.00
0.34
RD3-WR
5.50
3.38
2.88
4.13
0.56
RD4-WR
6.25
4.63
2.75
5.00
0.56
1.25
0.22
CD
5/16-18 UNC
X 3/4
3/8-16 UNC X 1
0.25
1/2-13 UNC X 1
2.50
0.38
1/2-13 UNC X 1
3.00
VMC PART NUMBER
VMC ISOL. COLOR
WEIGHT RANGE (LBS)
WEIGHT RANGE (KGS)
RD-3-CHARCOAL-WR
CHARCOAL
Up thru 825
UP TO 374
RD-4-BRICK RED-WR
BRICK RED
826 thru 1688
375 - 766
RD-4-CHARCOAL-WR
CHARCOAL
1689 thru 4000
767 - 1814
DW
1.75
FIG. 56 – DURALENE ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE
128
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
INSTALLATION OF DURULENE VIBRATION ISOLATORS INSTRUCTIONS
1. Read instructions in their entirety before beginning
installation.
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be
positioned in accordance with the submittal drawings or as otherwise recommended.
3. Set isolators on floor, housekeeping pad, or subbase, ensuring that all isolator centerlines match the
equipment mounting holes. The VMC group recommends that the isolator base (“A”) be installed on
a level surface. Shim or grout as required, leveling
all isolator bases to the same elevation (1/32-inch
maximum difference can be tolerated).
4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supporting structure
utilizing base thru holes (“B”).
5. Remove top bolt and top washer. Place equipment
on top of isolators so that mounting holes in equipment or base line up with threaded hole (“C”).
6. Reinstall top bolt and washer and tighten down.
7. Installation is complete.
TOP BOLT
("B")
D
TOP WASHER
D
("C")
CL
5
("B")
CL
SECTION D-D
("A")
LD13762B
FIG. 57 – INSTALLATION OF DURULENE VIBRATION ISOLATORS INSTRUCTIONS
JOHNSON CONTROLS
129
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
130
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING
COMMISSIONING
Commissioning of this unit should
only be carried out by Johnson Controls Authorized personnel.
Commissioning personnel should be thoroughly familiar
with the information contained in this literature, in
addition to this section.
Perform the commissioning using the detailed checks
outlined in the “Equipment Pre-startup & Startup Check
List” (Page 133) as the commissioning procedure is
carried out.
PREPARATION – POWER OFF
The following basic checks should be made with the
customer power to the unit switched OFF.
Inspection
Inspect unit for installation damage. If found, take action
and/or repair as appropriate.
Refrigerant Charge
Packaged units are normally shipped as standard with a
full refrigerant operating charge. Check that refrigerant
pressure is present in both systems and that no leaks are
apparent. If no pressure is present, a leak test must be
undertaken, the leak(s) located and repaired. Remote
systems and units are supplied with a nitrogen holding
charge. These systems must be evacuated with a suitable
vacuum pump/recovery unit as appropriate to below
500 microns.
Do not liquid charge with static water in the cooler.
Care must also be taken to liquid charge slowly to avoid
excessive thermal stress at the charging point. Once the
vacuum is broken, charge into the condenser coils with
the full operating charge as given in the “Technical
Data” section of ths IOM.
Service and Oil Line Valves
Open each compressor suction, economizer, and
discharge service valve. If valves are the back-seat type,
open them fully (counterclockwise) then close one turn
of the stem to ensure operating pressure is fed to pressure
transducers. Open the liquid line service valve and oil
return line ball valve fully in each system.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
Compressor Oil
To add oil to a circuit – connect a YORK hand oil
pump (Part No. 470-10654-000) to the 1/4" oil charging
connection on the compressors with a length of clean
hose or copper line, but do not tighten the flare nut.
Using clean oil of the correct type (“V” oil), pump oil
until all air has been purged from the hose then tighten
the nut. Stroke the oil pump to add oil to the oil system.
Approximately 1.8-2.3 gallons is present in the each
refrigerant system.
Oil levels in the oil equalizing line sight glass should be
between the bottom and the middle of the sight glass with
the system off. High oil levels may cause excessive oil
carryover in the system. High oil concentration in the
system may cause nuisance trips resulting from incorrect
readings on the level sensor and temperature sensors.
Temperature sensor errors may result in poor liquid
control and resultant liquid overfeed and subsequent
damage to the compressor. While running, a visible sign
of oil splashing in the sight glass is normal.
6
Fans
Check that all fans are free to rotate and are not damaged.
Ensure blades are at the same height when rotated.
Ensure fan guards are securely fixed.
Isolation / Protection
Verify all sources of electrical supply to the unit are taken
from a single point of isolation. Check that the maximum
recommended fuse sizes given in the “Technical Data”
section of ths IOM have not been exceeded.
Control Panel
Check the panel to see that it is free of foreign materials
(wire, metal chips, etc.) and clean out if required.
Power Connections
Check that the customer power cables are connected
correctly to the terminal blocks or optional circuit
breaker. Ensure that connections of power cables within
the panels to the circuit breaker or terminal blocks are
tight.
Grounding
Verify that the unit’s protective ground terminal(s) are
properly connected to a suitable grounding point. Ensure
that all unit internal ground connections are tight.
131
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING
Supply Voltage
Verify that the site voltage supply corresponds to the
unit requirement and is within the limits given in the
“Technical Data” section of ths IOM.
PREPARATION – POWER ON
Perform the commissioning using the
detailed checks outlined in the EQUIPMENT START-UP CHECK SHEET
as the commissioning procedure is
carried out.
Apply power to the chiller. Turn ON the option panel
circuit breaker if supplied.
The machine is now live!
Flow rates and pressure drops must be within the limits
given in the “Technical Data” section of ths IOM.
Operation outside of these limits is undesirable and
could cause damage.
If main power must be switched OFF for extended
maintenance or an extended shutdown period, the
compressor suction, discharge and economizer service
stop valves should be closed (clockwise). If there is
a possibility of liquid freezing due to low ambient
temperatures, the coolers should be drained or power
should be applied to the chiller. This will allow the
cooler heater to protect the cooler from freezing down to
–20 °F. Before placing the unit back in service, valves
should be opened and power must be switched on (if
power is removed for more than 8 hours) for at least 8
hours (24 hours if ambient temperature is below 86 °F
[30 °C]) before the unit is restarted.
Flow Switch
Switch Settings
Assure the chiller OFF/ON UNIT switch at the bottom
of the keypad is OFF. Place the optional circuit breaker
handle on the panel door to ON. The customer’s
disconnection devices can now be set to ON.
Verify the control panel display is illuminated. Assure
the system switches under the SYSTEM SWITCHES
Key are in the OFF position.
Compressor Heaters
Verify the compressor heaters are energized. If the
ambient temperature is above 96 °F (36 °C) the
compressor heaters must be on for at least 8 hours before
start-up to ensure all refrigerant liquid is driven out of
the compressor and the oil. If the ambient temperature
is below 86 °F (30 °C), allow 24 hours.
Verify a chilled water flow switch is correctly fitted in
the customer’s piping on the cooler outlet, and wired into
the control panel correctly using shielded cable.
There should be a straight run of at least 5 pipe diameters
on either side of the flow switch. The flow switch should
be connected to terminals 13 and 14 of XTBC1 on the
panel.
Temperature Sensor(s)
Ensure the leaving liquid temperature sensor is coated
with heat conductive compound (Part No. 013-00890000) and is inserted to the bottom of the water outlet
sensor well in the cooler. This sensor also provides some
freeze protection and must always be fully inserted in
the water outlet sensor well.
Water System
Verify the chilled liquid system has been installed
correctly, and has been commissioned with the correct
direction of water flow through the cooler. The inlet
should be at the refrigerant piping connection end of
the cooler. Purge air from the top of the cooler using
the plugged air vent mounted on the top of the cooler
body.
132
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING
EQUIPMENT PRE-STARTUP & STARTUP CHECKLIST
JOB NAME: ______________________________
SALES ORDER #: _________________________
LOCATION:­ ______________________________
SOLD BY:­________________________________
INSTALLING
CONTRACTOR: ___________________________
START‑UP
TECHNICIAN/
COMPANY: _______________________________
START‑UP DATE :­_________________________
CHILLER MODEL #: _______________________
SERIAL #: ______________________________
PRE-STARTUP
CHECKING THE SYSTEM
PRIOR TO INITIAL START (NO POWER)
Unit Checks
1. Inspect the unit for shipping or installation damage.
2. Assure that all piping has been completed.
3. Visually check for refrigerant piping leaks.
4. Open suction line ball valve, discharge line ball
valve, and liquid line valve for each system.
5. The compressor oil level should be maintained
so that an oil level is visible or splashing in the
sight glass when fully loaded. At shutdown, the
oil level should be between the bottom and middle
of the oil equalizing sight glass.
6. Assure water pumps are on. Check and adjust
water pump flow rate and pressure drop across
the cooler (see OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS).
Verify flow switch operation.
Excessive flow may cause catastrophic
damage to the heat exchanger (evaporator).
JOHNSON CONTROLS

7. Check the control panel to ensure it is free of foreign material (wires, metal chips, etc.).

8. Visually inspect wiring (power and control). Wiring MUST meet N.E.C. and local codes.

9. Check tightness of power wiring inside the power
panel on both sides of the motor contactors and
overloads.
10.Check for proper size fuses in main and control
circuits, and verify overload setting corresponds
with RLA and FLA values in electrical tables.
11.Assure 120VAC Control Power to TB1 has 15
amp minimum capacity.
12.Be certain all water temp sensors are inserted
completely in their respective wells and are coated
with heat conductive compound.
13.Assure that evaporator TXV bulbs are strapped
onto the suction lines at 4 or 8 o’clock positions
or suction temperature sensors if EEVs are installed.
6
COMPRESSOR HEATERS
(POWER ON – 24 HOURS PRIOR TO START)
1. Apply 120VAC and verify its value between terminals 5 and 2 of XTBC2. The voltage should be
120VAC +/- 10%.
Power must be applied 24 hours prior to
start-up.
Each heater should draw approximately 0.5-1A.
STARTUP
PANEL CHECKS
(POWER ON – BOTH UNIT SWITCH OFF)
 1.Apply 3-phase power and verify its value. Voltage imbalance should be no more than 2% of
the average voltage.
 2.Apply 120VAC and verify its value on the terminal block in the Power Panel. Make the measurement between terminals 5 and 2 of XTBC2.
The voltage should be 120VAC +/‑ 10%.
 3.Program/verify the Cooling Setpoints, Program
Setpoints, and unit Options. Record the values
in Table 7 (see sections on “Setpoints and Unit
Keys” located in this IOM for additional programming instruction).
133
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING
TABLE 7 – SETPOINTS ENTRY LIST
OPTIONS
Display Language
Sys 1 Switch
Sys 2 Switch
Chilled Liquid
*Ambient Control
Local/Remote Mode
Control Mode
Display Units
*Lead/Lag Control
*Fan Control
Manual Override
Current Feedback
** Soft Start
** Unit Type
** Refrigerant Type
** Expansion Valve Type
COOLING SETPOINTS
Cooling Setpoint
Range
EMS-PWM Max. Setpoint
PROGRAM
Discharge Pressure Cutout
Suct. Pressure Cutout
Low Amb. Temp. Cutout
Leaving Liquid Temp. Cutout
Anti-Recycle Time
Fan Control On Pressure
Fan Differential Off Pressure
Total # of Compressors
*Number of Fans/System
*Unit/Sys Voltage
Unit ID
* NOT ON ALL MODELS
** VIEWABLE ONLY
4. Put the unit into Service Mode (as described under the “Service and Troubleshooting” section of
this IOM) and cycle each condenser fan to ensure
proper rotation.
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
The chilled liquid setpoint may need to
be temporarily lowered to ensure all
compressors cycle “on.”
This unit uses scroll compressors
which can only operate in one direction. Failure to observe this will lead
to compressor failure.
6. Turn system 1 “OFF” and system 2 “ON” (refer
to Option 2 under the “Unit Keys” section of this
IOM for more information on system switches).
Place the Unit Switch in the control panel to the
“ON” position. As each compressor cycles “ON”,
ensure that the discharge pressure rises and the
suction pressure decreases. If this does not occur, the compressor being tested is operating in
the reverse direction and must be corrected. After
verifying proper compressor rotation, turn the
Unit Switch to “OFF”.
The chilled liquid setpoint may need to
be temporarily lowered to ensure all
compressors cycle “ON”.
5. Prior to this step, turn system 2 off (if applicable
refer to Option 2 under the “Unit Keys” section of this IOM for more information on system
switches). Connect a manifold gauge to system 1
suction and discharge service valves.
Place the Unit Switch in the control panel to the
“ON” position. As each compressor cycles on,
ensure that the discharge pressure rises and the
suction pressure decreases. If this does not occur, the compressor being tested is operating in
the reverse direction and must be corrected. After
verifying proper compressor rotation, turn the
Unit Switch to “OFF.”
134
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
CHECKING SUPERHEAT AND SUBCOOLING
The subcooling temperature of each system can be
calculated by recording the temperature of the liquid line
at the outlet of the condenser and subtracting it from the
liquid line saturation temperature at the liquid stop valve
(liquid line saturation temperature is converted from a
temperature/pressure chart).
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING
Assure that superheat is set at a minimum of 10 °F (5.56
°C) with a single compressor running on each circuit.
2. Record the suction temperature, suction pressure,
suction saturation temperature, and superheat of
each system below:
Example:
Liquid line pressure =
325 PSIG converted to temp. 101 °F
minus liquid line temp. - 83 °F
Subcooling = 18 °F
SYS 1 SYS 2
Suction Temp = _______ _______ °F
Suction Pressure = _______ _______PSIG
Saturation Temp = _______ _______ °F
Superheat = _______ _______ °F
The subcooling should be adjusted to 18 °F at design
conditions.
LEAK CHECKING
1. Record the liquid line pressure and its corresponding temperature, liquid line temperature and
subcooling below:
SYS 1 SYS 2
Liq Line Press = _______ _______PSIG
Saturated Temp = _______ _______ °F
Liq Line Temp = _______ _______ °F
Subcooling = _______ _______ °F
1. Leak check compressors, fittings, and piping to
ensure no leaks.
If the unit is functioning satisfactorily during the initial
operating period, no safeties trip and the compressors
cycle to control water temperature to setpoint, the chiller
is ready to be placed into operation.
6
After the subcooling is verified, the suction superheat
should be checked. The superheat should be checked
only after steady state operation of the chiller has been
established, the leaving water temperature has been pulled
down to the required leaving water temperature, and the
unit is running in a fully loaded condition. The correct
superheat setting for a system is 10 °F – 15 °F (5.56 °C –
8.33 °C) 18" (46 cm) from the heat exchanger.
Superheat should typically be set for no less than 10
°F with only a single compressor running on a circuit.
The superheat is calculated as the difference between the
actual temperature of the returned refrigerant gas in the
suction line entering the compressor and the temperature
corresponding to the suction pressure as shown in a
standard pressure/temperature chart.
Example:
Suction Temp = 46 °F
minus Suction Press
105 PSIG converted to Temp - 34 °F
Superheat = 12 °F
When adjusting the expansion valve (TXV only), the
adjusting screw should be turned not more than one
turn at a time, allowing sufficient time (approximately
15 minutes) between adjustments for the system and the
thermal expansion valve to respond and stabilize.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
135
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING
UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE
The operating sequence described below relates to
operation on a hot water start after power has been
applied, such as start-up commissioning. When a
compressor starts, internal timers limit the minimum
time before another compressor can start to one
minute.
1.For the chiller system to run, the flow switch must
be closed, any remote cycling contacts must be
closed, the daily schedule must not be scheduling
the chiller off, and temperature demand must be
present.
2.When power is applied to the system, the microprocessor will start a two minute timer. This is the
same timer that prevents an instantaneous start after
a power failure.
3.At the end of the two minute timer, the microprocessor will check for cooling demand. If all conditions
allow for start, a compressor on the lead system
will start and the liquid line solenoid will open.
Coincident with the start, the anti-coincident timer
will be set and begin counting downward from “60”
seconds to “0” seconds.
If the unit is programmed for Auto Lead/Lag, the
system with the shortest average run-time of the
compressors will be assigned as the “lead” system.
A new lead/lag assignment is made whenever all
systems shutdown.
136
4.Several seconds after the compressor starts, the
systems first condenser fan will be cycled on
(outdoor air temperature greater than 25 °F (-4
°C) or discharge pressure). See the “Operating
Controls” section of this IOM for details concerning condenser fan cycling.
5.After one minute of compressor run time, the
next compressor in sequence will start when a
system has to load. Additional compressors will be
started at 60 second intervals as needed to satisfy
temperature setpoint.
6.If demand requires, the lag system will cycle
on with the same timing sequences as the lead
system, after the lead system has run for five minutes. Refer to the “Capacity Control” section of
this IOM for a detailed explanation of system and
compressor staging.
7.As the load decreases below setpoint, the compressors will be shut down in sequence. This will occur
at intervals of either 60, 30, or 20 seconds based
on water temperature as compared to setpoint, and
control mode. See the “Capacity Control” section
of this IOM for a detailed explanation.
8.When the last compressor in a “system” (two or
three compressors per system), is to be cycled
off, the system will initiate a pump-down. Each
“system” has a pump-down feature upon shut-off.
On a non-safety, non-unit switch shutdown, the
LLSV will be turned off and the last compressor
will be allowed to run until the suction pressure
falls below the suction pressure cutout or for 180
seconds, whichever comes first.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
YORK MILLENNIUM CONTROL CENTER
LD13283
INTRODUCTION
IPU II and I/O Boards
The YORK MicroComputer Control Center is a
microprocessor based control system designed to provide
the entire control for the liquid chiller. The control logic
embedded in the microprocessor based control system
will provide control for the chilled liquid temperatures,
as well as sequencing, system safeties, displaying status,
and daily schedules. The MicroComputer Control Center
consists of four basic components:
• IPU II & I/O Boards
• Transformer
• Display
• Keypad.
The IPU II and I/O boards are assembled to function as a
single microprocessor controller requiring no additional
hardware. The IPU II board contains a coldfire
microprocessor and is the controller and decision
maker in the control panel. The I/O board handles all
of the chiller I/O (Inputs and Outputs). System inputs
from pressure transducers and temperature sensors are
connected to the I/O board. The I/O board contains a
processor capable of reading the inputs and controlling
the outputs. It communicates through the transition
header with the IPU II microprocessor.
The keypad allows programming and accessing setpoints,
pressures, temperatures, cutouts, daily schedule, options,
and fault information.
Remote cycling, demand limiting and chilled liquid
temperature reset can be accomplished by field supplied
contacts.
Compressor starting/stopping and loading/unloading
decisions are performed by the microprocessor to
maintain leaving or return chilled liquid temperature.
These decisions are a function of temperature deviation
from setpoint.
A master ON/Off switch is available to activate or
deactivate the unit.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
The I/O board circuitry multiplexes the analog inputs,
digitizes them, and constantly scans them to keep watch
on the chiller operating conditions. The input values are
transmitted serially to the IPU II microprocessor board.
From this information, the IPU II then issues commands
to the I/O board relay outputs to control contactors,
solenoids, etc. for Chilled Liquid Temperature Control
and to react to safety conditions. The I/O board
converts logic signals to operate relay outputs to 115
VAC levels used by motor contactors, fan contactors,
solenoid valves, etc. to control system operation. The
low voltage side of all relay coils on the I/O board are
powered by +12V.
Keypad commands are actuated upon by the
microprocessor to change setpoints, cutouts, scheduling,
operating requirements, and to provide displays. The
keypad and display are connected to the I/O board.
137
7
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
The on-board power supply converts 24VAC from
75VA, 120/24 VAC 50/60Hz UL listed class 2 power
transformer to +12V, +5V and +3.3V using switching
and linear voltage regulators located on the I/O and
IPU II boards. These voltages are used to operate
integrated circuitry on the board. The 40 character
display and unit sensors (transducers and temperature
sensors) are supplied power for the microprocessor
board +5V supply. 24VAC is rectified, but not regulated,
to provide unregulated +30 VDC to supply all of the
digital inputs.
The IPU II board contains one green “Power” LED
to indicate that the board is powered up and one red
“Status” LED to indicate, by blinking, that the processor
is operating.
The I/O board contains one green “Power” LED to
indicate that the board is powered up and one red
“Status” LED to indicate by blinking that the processor
is operating. The I/O board also contains two sets of
Receiver/Transmit LED’s, one for each available serial
communication port. The receive LED’s are green, and
the Transmit LED’s are red.
A jumper on the I/O board selects 4-20mA or 0-10
VDC as the input type on the remote temperature reset
analog input.
Unit Switch
A unit ON/OFF switch is located below the keypad.
This switch allows the operator to turn the entire unit
“OFF” if desired. The switch must be placed in the “ON”
position in order for the chiller to operate.
Display
The 40 character liquid crystal display (2 lines of 20
characters) is used for displaying system parameters
and operator messages.
Display messages may show characters indicating
“greater than” (>) or “less than” (<). These characters
indicate the actual values are greater than or less than
the limit values which are being displayed.
Keypad
The 12 button non-tactile keypad allows the user
to retrieve vitals system parameters such as system
pressures, temperatures, compressor running times
and starts, option information on the chiller, and
system setpoints. This data is useful for monitoring
chiller operation, diagnosing potential problems,
troubleshooting, and commissioning the chiller.
It is essential the user become familiar with using the
keypad and display. This will allow the user to make full
use of the capabilities and diagnostic features available.
Battery Back-up
The IPU II contains a Real Time Clock integrated circuit
chip with an internal battery backup. The purpose of
this battery backup is to assure any programmed values
(setpoints, clock, cutouts, etc.) are not lost during a
power failure regardless of the time involved in a power
cut or shutdown period.
Transformer
A 75VA, 120/24VAC 50/60Hz transformer is provided
to supply power to the Microprocessor Board, which in
turn rectifies, filters, and regulates as necessary to supply
power to the display, sensors, and transducers.
Programming # of Compressors
The total number of compressors is programmable under
the Program Key. Dual (two) system chillers can have
4, 5, or 6 compressors.
The display in conjunction with the keypad, allows the
operator to view system operating parameters as well
as access programmed information already in memory.
The display has a lighted background for night viewing
and for viewing in direct sunlight.
When a key is pressed, such as the OPER DATA key,
system parameters will be displayed and will remain
on the display until another key is pressed. The system
parameters can be scrolled with the use of the ↑ (UP)
and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys. The display will update all
information at a rate of about 1 per second.
138
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
“STATUS” KEY
00066VIP
Unit Status
Pressing the STATUS key will enable the operator to
determine current chiller operating status. The messages
displayed will include running status, cooling demand,
fault status, external cycling device status. The display
will be a single message relating to the highest priority
message as determined by the microprocessor board.
Status messages fall into the categories of General Status
and Fault Status.
The following General, Safety, and Warning messages
are displayed when the STATUS key is pressed.
Following each displayed message is an explanation
pertaining to that particular message.
General Status Messages
In the case of messages which apply to individual
systems, SYS 1 and SYS 2 messages will both be
displayed and may be different. In the case of single
system units, all SYS 2 messages will be blank.
UN I T SW I TCH OF F
S
H
U
T
D
O
W
N
This message informs the operator that the UNIT switch
on the control panel is in the OFF position which will
not allow the unit to run.
REMOT E CONTROL L ED
S
H
U
T
D
O
W
N
The REMOTE CONTROLLED SHUTDOWN message
indicates that either an ISN system or RCC has turned
the unit “OFF”, not allowing it to run.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
DA I LY SCHEDULE
S
H
U
T
D
O
W
N
The DAILY SCHEDULE SHUTDOWN message
indicates that the daily/holiday schedule program is
preventing the unit from running.
REMOTE STOP
NO RUN PERM
REMOTE STOP NO RUN PERM shows that a remote
start/stop contact is open in series with the flow switch.
These contacts are connected to Terminals 51 & 13 of
XTBC1. A 3-second delay is built into the software to
prevent nuisance shutdowns due to erroneous signals
on the run permissive input.
FLOW SWITCH
OPEN
FLOW SWITCH OPEN indicates the flow switch
contacts connected to Terminals 13 and 14 of XTBC1
are open. A 3-second delay is built into software to
prevent nuisance shutdowns due to erroneous signals
from the flow switch.
SYS 1 SYS SWI TCH OFF
SYS 2 SYS SWI TCH OFF
SYS SWITCH OFF indicates that the system switch
under OPTIONS is turned “OFF”. The system will not
be allowed to run until the switch is turned back on.
139
7
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
SYS 1 NO COOL LOAD
SYS 2 NO COOL LOAD
This message informs the operator that the chilled
liquid temperature is below the point (determined by
the setpoint and control range) that the microprocessor
board will bring on a system or that the microprocessor
board has not loaded the lead system far enough into
the loading sequence to be ready to bring the lag system
“ON”. The lag system will display this message until the
loading sequence is ready for the lag system to start.
SYS1COMPSRUNX
SYS2COMPSRUNX
The COMPS RUNNING message indicates that the
respective system is running due to demand. The “X”
will be replaced with the number of compressors in that
system that are running.
SYS1ARTIMERXXS
SYS2ARTIMERXXS
The anti-recycle timer message shows the amount of
time left on the respective systems anti-recycle timer.
This message is displayed when the system is unable to
start due the anti-recycle timer being active.
SYS1ACTIMERXXS
SYS2ACTIMERXXS
The anti-coincidence timer is a software feature that
guards against two systems starting simultaneously.
This assures instantaneous starting current does not
become excessively high due to simultaneous starts.
The microprocessor board limits the time between
compressor starts to one minute regardless of demand
or the anti-recycle timer being timed out. The anticoincidence timer is only present on two system units.
SYS 1 DSCH L I M I T I NG
SYS 2 DSCH L I M I T I NG
When this message appears, discharge pressure limiting
is in effect. The Discharge Pressure Limiting feature
is integral to the standard software control; however
the discharge transducer is optional on some models.
Therefore, it is important to keep in mind that this
control will not function unless the discharge transducer
is installed in the system.
140
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
The limiting pressure is a factory set limit to keep the
system from faulting on the high discharge pressure
cutout due to high load or pull down conditions. When
the unload point is reached, the microprocessor board
will automatically unload the affected system by deenergizing one compressor. The discharge pressure
unload will occur when the discharge pressure gets
within 10 PSIG (0.69 barg) of the programmed discharge
pressure cutout. This will only happen if the system is
fully loaded and will shut only one compressor off. If
the system is not fully loaded, discharge limiting will
not go into effect. Reloading the affected system will
occur when the discharge pressure drops to 85% of the
unload pressure and 10 minutes have elapsed.
SYS 1 SUCT L I M I T I NG
SYS 2 SUCT L I M I T I NG
When this message appears, suction pressure limiting is
in effect. The suction pressure limit is a control point that
limits the loading of a system when the suction pressure
drops to within 15% above the suction pressure cutout.
On a standard system programmed for 44 PSIG/3.0 Bar
suction pressure cutout, the microprocessor board would
inhibit loading of the affected system with the suction
pressure less than or equal to 1.15 x 44 PSIG/3.0 Bar
= 50 PSIG/3.5 Bar. The system will be allowed to load
after 60 seconds and after the suction pressure rises
above the suction pressure load limit point.
SYS 1 LOAD L I M I T XX%
SYS 2 LOAD L I M I T XX%
This message indicates that load limiting is in effect and
the percentage of the limiting in effect. This limiting
could be due to the load limit/pwm input, ISN or RCC
controller sending a load limit command.
M
A
N
U
A
L
O
V
E
R
RI
D
E
If MANUAL OVERRIDE mode is selected, the STATUS
display will show this message. This will indicate that
the Daily Schedule is being ignored and the chiller
will start-up when chilled liquid temperature allows
(Remote Contacts, UNIT switch and SYSTEM switches
permitting). This is a priority message and cannot be
overridden by anti-recycle messages, fault messages, etc.
when in the STATUS display mode. Therefore, do not
expect to see any other STATUS messages when in the
MANUAL OVERRIDE mode. MANUAL OVERRIDE
is only to be used in emergencies or for servicing. Manual
override mode automatically disables itself after 30
minutes.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SYS 1 PUMP I NG DOWN
SYS 2 PUMP I NG DOWN
The PUMPING DOWN message indicates that a
compressor in the respective system is presently in the
process of pumping the system down. When pumpdown
is initiated on shutdown, the liquid line solenoid or EEV
will close and a compressor will continue to run. When
the suction pressure decreases to the suction pressure
cutout setpoint or runs for 180 seconds, whichever
comes first, the compressor will cycle off.
Fault Safety Status Messages
Safety Status messages appear when safety thresholds
in the unit have been exceeded. Safeties are divided
into two categories – system safeties and unit safeties.
System safeties are faults that cause the individual
system to be shut down. Unit safeties are faults that cause
all running compressors to be shut down. The following
are display messages and explanations.
System Safeties
System safeties are faults that cause individual systems
to be shut down if a safety threshold is exceeded for 3
seconds. These are auto reset faults in that the system
will be allowed to restart automatically after the fault
condition is no longer present. However, if 3 faults on the
same system occur within 90 minutes, that system will
be locked out on the last fault. This condition requires a
manual reset. The system switch (under the OPTIONS
key) must be turned off and then back on to clear the
lockout fault. Fault messages will be displayed whenever
a system is locked out.
SYS1HIGHDSCHPRES
SYS2HIGHDSCHPRES
The Discharge Pressure Cutout is a software cutout in
the microprocessor and is backed-up by a mechanical
high pressure cutout switch located in the refrigerant
circuit. It assures that the system pressure does not
exceed safe working limits. The system will shutdown
when the programmable cutout is exceeded and will be
allowed to restart when the discharge pressure falls 40
PSIG below the cutout. Discharge transducers must be
installed for this function to operate.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
SYS 1 LOW SUCT PRESS
SYS 2 LOW SUCT PRESS
The Suction Pressure Cutout is a software cutout that
helps protect the chiller from an evaporator freeze-up
should the system attempt to run with a low refrigerant
charge or a restriction in the refrigerant circuit.
Repeated starts after resetting a low
suction pressure fault will cause evaporator freeze-up. Whenever a system
locks out on this safety or any safety,
immediate steps should be taken to
identify the cause.
At system start, the cutout is set to 10% of programmed
value. During the next 3 minutes the cutout point is
ramped up to the programmed cutout point. If at any time
during this 3 minutes the suction pressure falls below the
ramped cutout point, the system will stop. This cutout is
completely ignored for the first 30 seconds of system run
time to avoid nuisance shutdowns, especially on units
that utilize a low pressure switch in place of the suction
pressure transducer.
After the first 3 minutes, if the suction pressure falls
below the programmed cutout setting, a “transient
protection routine” is activated. This sets the cutout at
10% of the programmed value and ramps up the cutout
over the next 30 seconds. If at any time during this 30
seconds the suction pressure falls below the ramped
cutout, the system will stop.
SYS 1 MP / HPCO FAULT
SYS 2 MP / HPCO FAULT
SYS 1MP/HPCO INHIB
SYS 2MP/HPCO INHIB
The Motor Protector/Mechanical High Pressure Cutout
protects the compressor motor from overheating or the
system from experiencing dangerously high discharge
pressure.
This fault condition is present when CR1 (SYS 1) or
CR2 (SYS 2) relays de-energize due to the HP switch
or motor protector opening. This causes the respective
CR contacts to open causing 0VDC to be read on the
inputs to the microboard. The fault condition is cleared
when a 30VDC signal is restored to the input.
141
7
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
The internal motor protector opens at 185 °F – 248 °F
(85 °C – 120 °C) and auto resets. The mechanical HP
switch opens at 585 PSIG +/- 10 PSIG (27.92 barg +/- .69
barg) and closes at 330 PSIG +/- 25 PSIG (22.75 barg
+/- 1.72 barg).
The compressor is also equipped with a discharge
temperature sensor for the purpose of sensing internal
scroll temperature. This sensor protects the scrolls
from overheating due to inadequate cooling that may
occur when refrigerant charge is low or superheat is
too high.
When the sensor indicates a high temperature, it opens
the motor protector circuit in the compressor causing
the compressor to shut down.
During the first two faults an MP/HP INHIBIT message
will be displayed and the system will not be locked out.
Only after the third fault in 90 minutes will the MP/
HPCO FAULT message be displayed.
Whenever the motor protector or discharge sensor
shuts down a compressor and the system, the internal
compressor contacts will open for a period of 30 minutes
to assure that the motor or scroll temperatures have
time to dissipate the heat and cool down. The MP/
HP INHIBIT message will be displayed while these
contacts are open or when the HPCO is open. While
this message is displayed, the compressors will not be
permitted to start.
During the 30 minute timeout, the MP/HPCO INHIB
message will be displayed. The MP/HPCO fault will
only be displayed after 3 shutdowns in 90 minutes,
indicating the system is locked out and will not
restart.
S Y S 1H I G H
S Y S 2 H
I G H
M T R C U R R
M T R C U R R
When the System Current Feedback option is installed
and selected (Option 11 under OPTIONS Key Current
Feedback), this safety will operate as follows. If the
actual feedback voltage of the system, proportional to
currents, exceeds the programmed trip voltage for 5
seconds, the system will shutdown.
This safety will shut down a system if either suction
temperature or suction pressure sensors read out of
range high or low. This condition must be present for 3
seconds to cause a system shutdown. The safety locks
out a system after the first fault and will not allow
automatic restarting.
After 30 minutes, the contacts will close and the system
will be permitted to restart. The microprocessor board
will not try to restart the compressors in a system that
shuts down on this safety for a period of 30 minutes to
allow the internal compressor to time out.
142
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Unit Safeties
Unit safeties are faults that cause all running compressors
to be shut down. Unit faults are auto reset faults in that
the unit will be allowed to restart automatically after the
fault condition is no longer present.
UNITFAULT:
LOW AMBIENT TEMP
The Low Ambient Temp Cutout is a safety shutdown
designed to protect the chiller from operating in a low
ambient condition. If the outdoor ambient temperature
falls below the programmable cutout, the chiller will
shut down. Restart can occur when temperature rises 2
°F above the cutoff.
UNITFAULT:
LOW L I QU I D T EMP
The Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout protects
the chiller from an evaporator freeze-up should the
chilled liquid temperature drop below the freeze point.
This situation could occur under low flow conditions
or if the micropanel setpoint values are improperly
programmed. Anytime the leaving chilled liquid
temperature (water or glycol) drops below the cutout
point, the chiller will shutdown. Restart can occur when
chilled liquid temperature rises 2 °F above the cutout.
U
NITF
A
U
L
T:
1 1 5 VAC UNDER VOL TAGE
The Under Voltage Safety assures that the system is
not operated at voltages where malfunction of the
microprocessor could result in system damage. When the
115VAC to the micropanel drops below a certain level, a
unit fault is initiated to safely shut down the unit. Restart
is allowed after the unit is fully powered again and the
anti-recycle timers have finished counting down.
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
U N I T
F A U L T :
H I G H
M T R
C U R R
When the CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER UNIT
option is selected under the OPTIONS Key, the unit will
shut down when the voltage exceeds the programmed
trip voltage for 5 seconds.
The trip voltage is programmed at the factory according
to compressor or unit Running load Amps (RLA).
Restart will occur after the anti-recycle timer times
out.
Unit Warning
The following messages are not unit safeties and will not
be logged to the history buffer. They are unit warnings
and will not auto-restart. Operator intervention is
required to allow a restart of the chiller.
! ! LOW BATTERY ! !
CHECK PROG / SETP / OPTN
The Low Battery Warning can only occur at unit
power-up. On micropanel power-up, the RTC battery
is checked. If a low battery is found, all programmed
setpoints, program values, options, time, schedule, and
history buffers will be lost. These values will all be reset
to their default values which may not be the desired
operating values. Once a faulty battery is detected,
the unit will be prevented from running until the
PROGRAM key is pressed. Once PROGRAM is pressed
the anti-recycle timers will be set to the programmed
anti-recycle time to allow the operator time to check
setpoints, and if necessary, reprogram programmable
values and options.
If a low battery is detected, it should be replaced as
soon as possible. The programmed values will all be lost
and the unit will be prevented from running on the next
power interruption. The RTC/battery (031-02565-000)
is located at U5 on the microboard.
I N C O R R E C T
U N I T
T Y P E
This indicates the condensing unit jumper is installed
between J11-12 and J11-7. This jumper must be
removed to operate the chiller.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
143
7
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
STATUS KEY MESSAGES
TABLE 8 – STATUS KEY MESSAGES QUICK REFERENCE LIST
STATUS KEY MESSAGES
General Messages
Fault Messages
Unit Switch Off
Shutdown
System Safeties
Unit Safeties &
Warning Messages
Remote Controlled
Shutdown
System X High Disch Pressure
Low Ambient Temp
Daily Schedule
Shutdown
System X Low Suct Pressure
Low Liquid Temp
System X MP/HPCO Inhibit
115VAC Undervoltage
Rem Stop
No Run Permissive
Flow Switch
Open
System X MP/HPCO Fault
System X Switch Off
System X
No Cooling load
System X HIGH MTR CURR
(Optional)
Low Battery
Check Prog/Step/Optn
(Unit Warning Message)
Incorrect Unit Type
(Unit Warning Message)
System X Comps Run
System X AR Timer
High Motor Current
System X AC Timer
System X Disch Limiting
System X Suction Limiting
System X Percentage Load Limiting
LD11297B
Manual Overide Status
System X Pumping Down (on shutdown)
144
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
DISPLAY/PRINT KEYS
00067VIP
The DISPLAY/PRINT keys allow the user to retrieve
system and unit information that is useful for monitoring
chiller operation, diagnosing potential problems,
troubleshooting, and commissioning the chiller.
System and unit information, unit options, setpoints,
and scheduling can also be printed out with the use of
a printer. Both real-time and history information are
available.
Oper Data Key
The OPER DATA key gives the user access to unit and
system operating parameters. When the OPER DATA
key is pressed, system parameters will be displayed and
remain on the display until another key is pressed. After
pressing the OPER DATA key, the various operating data
screens can be scrolled through by using the ↑ (UP) and
↓ (DOWN) arrow keys or the ENTER/ADV key located
under the “ENTRY” section.
System 2 information will only be displayed for 2 system units.
With the “UNIT TYPE” set as a liquid chiller (no jumper
from J11-7 to J11-12 on the I/O Board), the following
list of operating data screens are viewable under the
OPER DATA key in the order that they are displayed.
The ↓ (DOWN) arrow key scrolls through the displays
in the order they appear below:
The chiller MUST be set to be a liquid
chiller (no jumper from J11-7 to J1112 on the I/O Board). DO NOT operate the chiller if not properly set up.
LCHLT = 46.2°F
RCHL T = 5 7 . 4 ° F °
This display shows chilled leaving and return liquid
temperatures. The minimum limit on the display for
these parameters are 2.2 °F (-19 °C). The maximum
limit on the display is 140 °F (60 °C).
AMBIENT AIR TEMP
=8
7.5°
F
This display shows the ambient air temperature. The
minimum limit on the display is 0.4 °F (-17.6 °C). The
maximum limit on the display is 131.2 °F (55.1 °C).
JOHNSON CONTROLS
145
7
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
SYSXSP=72.1PSIG
D
P=
2
2
7.0P
SI
G
These displays show suction and discharge pressures
for each system. The discharge pressure transducer is
optional on some models.
If the optional discharge transducer is not installed, the
discharge pressure would display 0 PSIG (0 barg).
The minimum limits for the display are:
Suction Pressure: 0 PSIG (0 barg)
Discharge Pressure: 0 PSIG (0 barg)
The maximum limits for the display are:
Suction Pressure: 400 PSIG (27.58 barg)
Discharge Pressure: 650 PSIG (44.82 barg)
SYS X HOURS 1=XXXXX
2= X X X X X, 3 = X X X X X
SYSXSTARTS1=XXXXX
2= X X X X X, 3 = X X X X X
The above two messages will appear sequentially for
each system. The first display shows accumulated
running hours of each compressor for the specific
system. The second message shows the number of starts
for each compressor on each system.
Run times and starts will only be displayed for the actual number of systems and compressors on the unit.
A total of 99,999 hours and starts can be logged before
the counter rolls over to “0”.
L O A D T I M E R
5 8 S E C
UNLOAD T I MER 0 SEC
This display of the load and unload timers indicate
the time in seconds until the unit can load or unload.
Whether the systems loads or unloads is determined by
how far the actual liquid temperature is from setpoint.
A detailed description of unit loading and unloading is
covered under the Capacity Control topic.
146
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
COOL I NG DEMAND
2OF8STEPS
The display COOLING DEMAND indicates the current
“step” in the capacity control scheme when in Return
Water Control Mode. The number of available steps
are determined by how many compressors are in the
unit. In the above display, the “2” does not mean that
two compressor are running but only indicates that the
capacity control scheme is on step 2 of 8. Capacity
Control is covered in more detail in this publication
which provides specific information on compressor
staging (for Return Water Control only).
T EMP ERROR XXX . X ° F
TEMP RATE XXX . X ° F / M
The COOLING DEMAND message will be replaced
with this message when Leaving Chilled liquid control
is selected. This message indicates the temperature
error and the rate of change of the chilled liquid
temperature.
LEAD SYSTEM I S
S Y S T EM NUMBER 2
This display indicates the current LEAD system. In this
example system 2 is the LEAD system, making system
1 the LAG system. The LEAD system can be manually
selected or automatic. Refer to the programming under
the “OPTIONS” key. The Lead System display will only
appear on a two system unit.
A unit utilizing hot gas bypass should
be programmed for MANUAL with
system 1 as the lead system. Failure
to do so will prevent hot gas operation
if system 2 switches to the lead system
when programmed for AUTOMATIC
LEAD/LAG.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
E VAPORATOR HEATER
ST
A
T
U
SIS=
X
X
X
This display indicates the status of the evaporator
heater. The evaporator heater is controlled by ambient
air temperature. When the ambient temperature drops
below 40 °F (4.4 °C) the heater is turned on. When
the temperature rises above 45 °F (7.2 °C) the heater
is turned off. An under voltage condition will keep the
heater off until full voltage is restored to the system.
EV
A
P
O
R
A
T
O
RW
A
T
E
R
PU
M
PS
T
A
T
U
S=
X
X
X
X
The evaporator pump dry contacts are energized when
any compressor is running,
or
the unit is not OFF on the daily schedule and the unit
switch is on,
or
the unit has shutdown on a Low Leaving Chilled Liquid
fault.
However, even if one of above is true, the pump will not
run if the micropanel has been powered up for less than
30 seconds or if the pump has run in the last 30 seconds
to prevent pump motor overheating.
EVAP PUMP TOTAL RUN
H
O
U
R
S=
X
X
X
X
X
The Evaporator Pump Total Run Hours display indicates
the total pump run hours. Total hours continually
increments similar to Compressor Run Hours. If dual
pumps are fitted, run hours indicates total hours on both
pumps.
ACT I VE REMOTE CTRL
N
O
N
E
There are several types of remote systems that can
be used to control or monitor the unit. The following
messages indicate the type of remote control mode
active:
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
* R e f e r t o t h e s e c t i o n o n O P E R AT I N G
CONTROLS.
If the microprocessor board is programmed for
CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER UNIT under the
OPTIONS Key, the display will show up as the first
display prior to the SYS 1 displays. Total chiller current
is displayed as shown below:
U N I T A M P S = 5 4 . 0
V O L T S =
1 . 2
If the microprocessor board is programmed for
CURRENT FEEDBACK NONE, no current display
will appear.
SYSXCOMPSTATUS
1=XXX 2=XXX 3=XXX
S Y S X R U N
T I M E
XX-XX-XX-XX D-H-M-S
SYSXLLSV ISON
HOTGASSOL ISOFF
S Y S X F A N
S T A G E
3
S Y S X A M P S = 3 6 . 0
V O L T S =
0 . 8
7
The preceding five messages will appear sequentially,
first for system 1, then for system 2.
The first message indicates the system and the associated
compressors which are running.
The second message indicates the system run time in
days – hours – minutes – seconds. Please note that this
is not accumulated run time but pertains only to the
current system cycle.
ISN – YORK Talk via ISN allows remote load limiting
and temperature reset through an ISN system.
The third message indicates the system, and whether the
liquid line solenoid or EEV pilot solenoid and hot gas
solenoid are being turned on by the microboard. Please
note that hot gas is not available for system 2, so there
is no message pertaining to the hot gas solenoid when
system 2 message is displayed.
LOAD LIM – L oad limiting enabled using contact
closure.
The fourth message indicates the stage of condenser fan
operation that is active.
NONE – no remote control is active. Remote monitoring
may be via ISN.
PWM TEMP – EMS temperature reset
JOHNSON CONTROLS
147
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
See the “Condenser Fan Control” section in the “Unit
Operation” section of this IOM for more information.
The fifth message displays current as sensed by the
optional current feedback circuitry. The display reads
out in amps along with the DC feedback voltage from
the module. Current is calculated by:
225A x Actual Volts
5 Volts
Individual displays will be present for each system,
if CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER SYSTEM is
programmed under the OPTIONS key. Combined
compressor current for each system is displayed.
Oper Data Quick Reference List
The following table is a quick reference list for
information available under the OPER DATA key.
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
TABLE 9 – OPERATION DATA
Oper Data Key
Leaving & Chilled Liquid Temps
Ambient Air Temperature
System 1 Discharge & Suction Pressure
*System X Accumulated Hours
*System X Accumulated Starts
Load and Unload Timers
Cooling Demand Steps
(Return Chilled Liquid Control Only)
Temp Rate & Temp Error
(Leaving Chilled Liquid Control Only)
Lead System Indicator
Evaporator Heater Status
Evaporator Water Pump Status
Active Remote Control
Current Feedback One Per Unit
*System X Compressors Status
*System X Run Time
* Sys X LLSV & HGSV Status
*System X Condenser Fan Stage
Current Feedback One Per System
* Block of information repeats for each system
148
LD12585
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
Print Key
The PRINT key allows the operator to obtain a printout
of real-time system operating data or a history printout
of system data at the “instant of the fault” on the last six
faults which occurred on the unit. An optional printer is
required for the printout.
Operating Data Printout
Pressing the PRINT key and then OPER DATA key
allows the operator to obtain a printout of current system
operating parameters. When the OPER DATA key is
pressed, a snapshot will be taken of system operating
conditions and panel programming selections. This data
will be temporarily stored in memory and transmission
of this data will begin to the printer. A sample Operating
Data printout is shown below. (Note: Not all values are
printed for all models.)
YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
MILLENNIUM LIQUID CHILLER
UNIT STATUS
2:04PM 01 AUG 09
SYS 1
SYS 2
NO COOLING LOAD
COMPRESSORS RUNNING 2
OPTIONS
CHILLED LIQUID
WATER
AMBIENT CONTROL
STANDARD
LOCAL/REMOTE MODE
REMOTE
CONTROL MODE
LEAVING LIQUID
LEAD/LAG CONTROL
AUTOMATIC
FAN CONTROL
AMB & DSCH PRESS
CURRENT FEEDBACK
NONE
POWER FAILURE RESTART AUTOMATIC
SOFT START
ENABLED
EXPANSION VALVE THERMOSTATIC
REMOTE TEMP RESET 4 TO 20 MA
PROGRAM VALUES
DSCH PRESS CUTOUT
570 PSIG
SUCT PRESS CUTOUT
80 PSIG
SUCT PRESS CUT COOLING 42 PSIG
SUCT PRESS CUT HEATING 31 PSIG
LOW AMBIENT CUTOUT
25.0 DEGF
LEAVING LIQUID CUTOUT 25.0 DEGF
ANTI RECYCLE TIME
600 SECS
FAN CONTROL ON PRESS
425 PSIG
FAN DIFF OFF PRESS
125 PSIG
NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS
6
NUMBER OF FANS PER SYSTEM
4
UNIT TRIP VOLTS
3.0
REFRIGERANT TYPE
R-22
DEFROST INIT TEMP
41.0 DEGF
DEFROST INITIATION TIME
60MIN
DEFROST TERMINATION TIME
3MIN
BIVALENT HEAT DELAY TIME 30 MIN
REMOTE UNIT ID PROGRAMMED
2
YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS
1 (410a)
PUMP TOTAL RUN HOURS XXXXX (410a)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
UNIT DATA
RETURN LIQUID TEMP
58.2 DEGF
LEAVING LIQUID TEMP
53.0 DEGF
DISCHARGE AIR TEMP
55.3 DEGF
COOLING RANGE 42.0 +/- 2.0 DEGF
HEATING RANGE 122.0 +/- 2.0 DEGF
SYS 1 SETPOINT
70 +/- 3 PSIG
SYS 2 SETPOINT
70 +/- 3 PSIG
REMOTE SETPOINT
44.0 DEGF
AMBIENT AIR TEMP
74.8 DEGF
LEAD SYSTEM
SYS 2
EVAPORATOR PUMP
ON
EVAPORATOR HEATER
OFF
ACTIVE REMOTE CONTROL
NONE
LAST DEFROST SYS X DURATION XXXS
TIME TO SYS X DEFROST
XX MIN
BIVALENT DELAY REMAINING XX MIN
UNIT XXX.X AMPS
X.X VOLTS
SOFTWARE VERSION
C.M02.13.00
SYSTEM 1 DATA
COMP STATUS 1=OFF 2=OFF 3=OFF
RUN TIME
0- 0- 0- 0 D-H-M-S
TIME YYYYYYY0- 0- 0- 0 D-H-M-S
LAST STATE
YYYYYYY
SUCTION PRESSURE
105 PSIG
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
315 PSIG
SUCTION TEMPERATURE 46.0 DEGF
SAT SUCTION TEMP
34.0 DEGF
SUCTION SUPERHEAT
12.0 DEGF
COOLER INLET REFRIG 31.6 DEGF
DEFROST TEMPERATURE 52.8 DEGF
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID
OFF
MODE SOLENOID
OFF
HOT GAS BYPASS VALVE
OFF
CONDENSER FAN STAGE
OFF
EEV OUTPUT
0.0 %
SYSTEM
XXX.X AMPS X.X VOLTS
7
SYSTEM 2 DATA
COMP STATUS 1=ON, 2=OFF, 3=ON
RUN TIME
0-0-1-46 D-H-M-S
TIME YYYYYYY
0-0-0-0 D-H-M-S
LAST STATE
YYYYYYY
SUCTION PRESSURE
110 PSIG
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
320 PSIG
SUCTION TEMPERATURE 49.3 DEGF
SAT SUCTION TEMP
36.0 DEGF
SUCTION SUPERHEAT
13.3 DEGF
COOLER INLET REFRIG 31.6 DEGF
DEFROST TEMPERATURE 52.8 DEGF
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID
ON
MODE SOLENOID
ON
CONDENSER FAN STAGE
3
EEV OUTPUT
63.2%
SYSTEM
XXX.X AMPS X.X VOLTS
S M
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
HOL
DAILY SCHEDULE
T W T F S
*=HOLIDAY
START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
149
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
See the “Service And Troubleshooting”
section of this IOM for Printer Installation information.
History Printout
Pressing the PRINT key and then the HISTORY key
allows the operator to obtain a printout of information
relating to the last 9 Safety Shutdowns which occurred.
The information is stored at the instant of the fault,
regardless of whether the fault caused a lockout to
occur. The information is also not affected by power
failures (long-term internal memory battery backup
is built into the circuit board) or manual resetting of a
fault lock-out.
When the HISTORY key is pressed, a printout is
transmitted of all system operating conditions which
were stored at the “instant the fault occurred” for each of
the 9 Safety Shutdowns buffers. The printout will begin
with the most recent fault which occurred. The most
recent fault will always be stored as Safety Shutdown
No. 1. identically formatted fault information will then
be printed for the remaining safety shutdowns.
Information contained in the Safety Shutdown buffers is
very important when attempting to troubleshoot a system
problem. This data reflects the system conditions at the
instant the fault occurred and often reveals other system
conditions which actually caused the safety threshold
to be exceeded.
History Displays
The HISTORY key gives the user access to many unit
and system operating parameters at the time of a unit
or system safety shutdown. When the HISTORY key is
pressed the following message is displayed.
D I SPLAY SAFETY SHUT D OWN N O . 1 ( 1 TO 9 )
While this message is displayed, the ↑ (UP) arrow key
can be used to select any of the six history buffers. Buffer
number 1 is the most recent, and buffer number 6 is the
oldest safety shutdown that was saved.
After selecting the shutdown number, pressing the
ENTER key displays the following message which
shows when the shutdown occurred.
SHUTDOWN OCCURRED
03:56 PM29JAN02
The ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys are used to scroll
forward and backward through the history buffer to
display the shutdown conditions stored at the instant the
fault occurred. The ↓ (DOWN) arrow key scrolls through
the displays in the order they appear below:
UNITFAULT:
LOW L I QU I D T EMP
Displays the type of fault that occurred.
U
NITT
Y
P
E
LIQUID CHILLER
The history printout is similar to the operational data
printout shown in the previous section. The differences
are in the header and the schedule information. The daily
schedule is not printed in a history print.
Displays the type of chiller; Liquid, Condensing Unit
or Heat Pump.
The following is one example of a history buffer printout.
The data part of the printout will be exactly the same as
the operational data print so it is not repeated here. The
difference is that the Daily Schedule is not printed in the
history print and the header will be as follows.
Displays the chilled liquid type; Water or Glycol.
YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
MILLENNIUM LIQUID CHILLER
SAFETY SHUTDOWN NUMBER 1
SHUTDOWN @ 3:56PM 01 AUG 09
SYS 1
SYS 2
150
HIGH DSCH PRESS SHUTDOWN
NO FAULTS
CHILLED LIQUID
X
X
X
X
X
AMB I ENT CONTROL
XXXXXXXXXX
Displays the type of Ambient Control; Standard or Low
Ambient.
L O C A L / RE M O T E MO D E
XXXXXXXXX
Displays Local or Remote control selection.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
CONTROL MODE
LEAVING LIQUID
Displays the type of chilled liquid control; Leaving or
Return.
L EAD / L AG CONTROL
XXXXXXXX
Displays the type of lead/lag control; Manual System 1,
Manual System 2 or Automatic. This is only selectable
on 2-system chillers.
F AN CONTROL
D I SCHARGE PRESSURE
Displays the type of fan control; Discharge Pressure or
Ambient and Discharge Pressure.
MANUAL OVERR I DE MODE
XXXXXXXXX
Displays whether Manual Override was Enabled or
Disabled.
C U R R E N T
F E E D B A C K
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Displays type of Current Feedback utilized.
S O F T S T A R T
X X X X X X X
Displays whether the optional European Soft Start was
installed and selected.
D I SCHARGE PRESSURE
CUTOUT = XXXX PS I G
Displays the programmed Discharge Pressure Cutout.
SUCT I ON PRESSURE
CUTOUT = XXXX PS I G
Displays the programmed Suction Pressure Cutout.
LOW AMBIENT TEMP
CUTOUT = XXX . X ° F
Displays the programmed Low Ambient Cutout.
L EAV I NG L I QU I D TEMP
CUTOUT = XXX . X ° F
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
F AN CONTROL ON
PRESSURE = XXX PS I G
Displays the programmed Fan On Pressure.
F A N D I F F E R E N T I A LO F F
PRESSURE = PS I G
Displays the programmed Fan Off Differential.
S Y S 1
T R I P
= X . X
V O L T S
V O L T S
Displays the programmed High Current Trip Voltage.
S Y S 2 T R I P V O L T S
= X . X
V O L T S
Displays the programmed High Current Trip Voltage.
Y
O
R
KH
Y
D
R
O
KITP
U
M
P
S=
X
Indicates the Pump Control option is selected.
LCHLT = XXX . X ° F
RCHL T = XXX . X ° F
Displays the Leaving and Return chilled Liquid
Temperature at the time of the fault.
SETPO I NT = XXX . X ° F
RANGE=+/-°F
Displays the programmed Setpoint and Range, if
the chiller is programmed for leaving chilled liquid
control.
SETPO I NT = XXX . X ° F
RANGE=+XX.X°F
Displays the programmed Setpoint and Range, if the
chiller is programmed for return chilled liquid control.
AMBIENT AIR TEMP
=X
X
X.X°
F
Displays the Ambient Temp. at the time of the fault.
LEAD SYSTEM I S
S Y S T EM NUMBER X
Displays which system is in the lead at the time of the
fault.
Displays the Leaving Liquid Temp. Cutout
programmed.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
151
7
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
E VAPORATOR HEATER
ST
A
T
U
SISX
X
X
Displays status of the Evaporator Heater at the time of
the fault.
E VAPORA TOR WA T ER
PU
M
PS
T
A
T
U
SX
X
X
X
Displays status of Evaporator Water Pump at the time
of fault. Status may read on, off or trip.
EVAPPUMPTOTALRUN
H
O
U
R
S=
X
X
X
X
Evap Pump total run hours at the time of fault.
ACT I VE REMOTE CTRL
X
X
X
X
Displays whether Remote Chiller Control was active
when the fault occurred.
UN I T ACTUAL AMPS
=
X
X
X.XA
M
P
S
This is only displayed when the Current Feedback
Option is one per unit.
SYSXCOMPSTATUS
1=XXX 2=XXX 3=XXX
Displays which Compressors were running in the system
when the fault occurred.
SYSXRUNTIME
XX-XX-XX-XX D-H-M-S
Displays the system run time when the fault occurred.
SYSXSP=XXXXPSIG
D
P=X
X
X
XP
SI
G
Displays the system Suction and Discharge Pressure of
the time of the fault.
SYSXSUCT=XXX.X°F
SATSUCT=XXX.X°F
Displays the System Suction Temp and Saturated
Suction Temp when an EEV is installed.
152
SYSXLLSV ISXXX
HOTGASSOL ISXXX
Displays whether the System Liquid Line Solenoid
or Hot Gas Solenoid was energized at the time of the
fault.
SYSXFANSTAGEXXX
Displays the number of Fan Stages in the system active
at the time of the fault.
SYSX A
CTUALAMPS
=
X
X
X.XA
M
P
S
Displays the system amperage (calculated approximately)
at the time of the fawult.
For this message to appear, CURRENT FEEDBACK
ONE PER SYSTEM must be programmed under the
options key. If the microprocessor board is programmed
as one CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER UNIT under
the program key, the display will be the first display
prior to the SYS 1 info. If the microprocessor board is
programmed for CURRENT FEEDBACK NONE, no
current display will appear.
Displays for System 1 starting with SYS X NUMBER
OF COMPS RUNNING X through SYS X AMPS =
XXX.X VOLTS = X.X will be displayed first, followed
by displays for System 2.
Further explanation of the above displays is covered
under the STATUS, OPER DATA, COOLING
SETPOINTS, PROGRAM, and OPTIONS keys.
Software Version
The software version may be viewed by first pressing
the HISTORY key and then repeatedly pressing the ↓
(DOWN) arrow key until you scroll past the first history
buffer choice.
D I SPLAY SAFETY SHUT DOWNNO.1 (1TO6)
After the ↓ (DOWN) arrow key is pressed again, the
software version will appear.
C ONTROL C.MXX.ZZ.Y Y
I/
O
C.
M
X
X.
1
8.
Y
Y
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
“ENTRY” KEYS
7
00068VIP
The ENTRY keys allows the user to view, change
programmed values. The ENTRY keys consist of an ↑
(UP) arrow key, ↓ (DOWN) arrow key, and an ENTER/
ADV key.
Up and Down Arrow Keys
Used in conjunction with the OPER DATA, HISTORY,
COOLING SETPOINTS, SCHEDULE/ADVANCE
DAY, OPTIONS and CLOCK keys, the ↑ (UP) and
↓(DOWN) arrow keys allow the user to scroll through
the various data screens. Refer to the section on
“DISPLAY/PRINT” keys for specific information on the
displayed information and specific use of the ↑ (UP) and
↓ (DOWN) arrow keys.
Enter/ADV Key
The ENTER/ADV key must be pushed after any change
is made to the cooling setpoints, daily schedule, safety
setpoints, chiller options, and the clock. Pressing this key
“enters” the new values into memory. If the ENTER/
ADV key is not pressed after a value is changed, the
changes will not be “entered” and the original values
will be used to control the chiller.
Programming and a description on the use of the ↑ (UP)
arrow key, and ↓ (DOWN) arrow, and ENTER/ADV
keys are covered in detail under the SETPOINTS and
UNIT keys.
The ↑ (UP) arrow key, and ↓ (DOWN) arrow key are also
used for programming the control panel such as changing
numerical or text values when programming cooling
setpoints, setting the daily schedule, changing safety
setpoints, chiller options, and setting the clock.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
153
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
“SETPOINTS” KEYS
00069VIP
Programming of the cooling setpoints, daily schedule,
and safeties is accomplished by using the keys located
under the SETPOINTS section of the control panel.
The three keys involved are labeled COOLING
SETPOINTS, SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY, and
PROGRAM.
The following are instructions for programming the
respective setpoints. The same instruction should be
used to view the setpoints with the exception that the
setpoint will not be changed.
Cooling Setpoints
The Cooling Setpoint and Range can be programmed by
pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key. The cooling
mode (leaving chilled liquid or return chilled liquid) will
be displayed for a few seconds, and the setpoint display
entry screen will appear.
Leaving Chilled Liquid Control
SETPOINT=45.0°F
RANGE = +/- 2 . 0 ° F
The above message shows the current chilled water
temperature SETPOINT at 45.0 °F (notice the cursor
positioned under the number 0). Pressing either the ↑
(UP) or ↓ (DOWN) arrow will change the setpoint in
.5 °F increments. After using the ↑ (UP) or ↓ (DOWN)
arrow keys to adjust to the desired setpoint, the ENTER/
ADV key must be pressed to enter this number into
memory and advance to the RANGE SETPOINT.
Entry of the setpoint will be indicated by the cursor
moving under the current RANGE setpoint. The ↑ (UP)
and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys are used to set the RANGE,
in .5 °F increments, to the desired RANGE setpoint.
After adjusting the setpoint, the ENTER/ADV key must
be pressed to enter the data into memory.
Notice that the RANGE was programmed for plus or
minus X.X° F. This indicates the SETPOINT to be in
the center of the control range. If the control mode
has been programmed for RETURN LIQUID control,
the message below would be displayed in place of the
previous message.
154
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
When in leaving chilled liquid temperature control,
the microprocessor board will attempt to control the
leaving water temperature within the temperature range
of the setpoint plus or minus the range. In the above
example, control will be in the range of 43°F – 47 °F
(6.1 °C - 8.3°C).
Return Chilled Liquid Control
SETPOINT=45.0 °F
R A N G E = + 1 0 . 0 ° F
In return chilled liquid control, the range no longer has
a +/- X.X °F, but only a + X.X °F RANGE setpoint.
This indicates that the setpoint is not centered within
the RANGE but could be described as the bottom
of the control range. A listing of the limits and the
programmable values for the COOLING SETPOINTS
are shown in Table 10.
The SETPOINT and RANGE displays just described
were based on LOCAL control. If the unit was
programmed for REMOTE control (under the OPTIONS
key), the above programmed setpoints would have no
effect.
When in return chilled liquid temperature control,
the microprocessor board will turn all compressors
off at setpoint and will turn compressors on as return
chilled liquid temperature rises. All compressors will
be on at setpoint plus the range. If the range equals
the temperature drop across the evaporator when fully
loaded, the leaving chilled liquid temperature will
remain near the setpoint, plus or minus a few degrees as
the chiller loads and unloads according to return chilled
liquid temperature.
Both LEAVING and RETURN control are described
in detail under the “Capacity Control” section of this
IOM.
Remote Setpoints Control
Pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key a second
time will display the remote setpoint and cooling
range. This display automatically updates about every
2 seconds. Notice that these setpoints are not “locally”
programmable, but are controlled by a remote device
such as an ISN control, remote reset option board, or
remote PWM signal. These setpoints would only be valid
if the unit was operating in the REMOTE mode.
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
The following messages illustrate both leaving
chilled liquid control and return chilled liquid control
respectively.
REMSETP = 44.0°F
RANGE=+/-2.0°F
(leaving chilled liquid control)
REMSETP = 44.0°F
R
A
N
G
E=
+ 1
0.0°
F
(return chilled liquid control)
The low limit, high limit, and default values for the keys
under “SETPOINTS” are listed in Table 10.
Pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS a third time will
bring up the display that allows the Maximum EMSPWM Temperature Reset to be programmed. This
message is shown below.
M A X E M S - P WM R E M O T E
T E M P R E S E T = + 2 0 ° F
The Temp Reset value is the maximum allowable remote
reset of the temperature setpoint. The setpoint can be
reset upwards by the use of an Energy Management
System. See page 164 & 176 for a detailed explanation
of this feature.
As with the other setpoints, the ↑ (UP) arrow and ↓
(DOWN) arrow keys are used to change the Temp Reset
value. After using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrows to
adjust to the desired setpoint, the ENTER/ADV key must
be pressed to enter this number into memory.
SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY KEY
The SCHEDULE is a seven day daily schedule that
allows one start/stop time per day. The schedule can be
programmed Monday through Sunday with an alternate
holiday schedule available. If no start/stop times are
programmed, the unit will run on demand, providing the
chiller is not shut off on a unit or system shutdown. The
daily schedule is considered “not programmed” when
the times in the schedule are all zeros (00:00 AM).
To set the schedule, press the SCHEDULE/ADVANCE
DAY key. The display will immediately show the
following display.
M
ONSTART=00 : 00 AM
S
T
O
P=0
0:0
0A
M
JOHNSON CONTROLS
155
7
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
TABLE 10 – COOLING SETPOINTS, PROGRAMMABLE LIMITS AND DEFAULTS
SETPOINT KEY
MODE
WATER COOLING
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID SETPOINT
GLYCOL COOLING*
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID
—
CONTROL RANGE
WATER COOLING
RETURNED CHILLED LIQUID SETPOINT
GLYCOL COOLING*
RETURN CHILLED LIQUID
—
CONTROL RANGE
MAX EMS-REMOTE
—
TEMPERATURE RESET
LOW LIMIT
40.0 °F
4.4 °C
10.0 °F
-12.2 °C
1.5 °F
0.8 °C
40.0 °F
4.4 °C
10.0 °F
12.2 °C
4.0 °F
2.2 °C
2 °F
1.0 °C
HIGH LIMIT
**70.0 °F
21.1 °C
**70.0 °F
21.1 °C
2.5 °F
1.4 °C
70.0 °F
21.1 °C
70.0 °F
21.1 °C
20.0 °F
11.1 °C
40 °F
22.0 °C
DEFAULT
44.0 °F
6.7 °C
44.0 °F
6.7 °C
2.0 °F
1.1 °C
44.0 °F
6.7 °C
44.0 °F
6.7 °C
10.0 °F
5.6 °C
20 °F
11.0 °C
* Refer to Engineering Guide for operation below 30 °F (-1.1 °C). Alternate thermal expansion valves must be used
below 30 °F (-1.1 °C).
* When using glycol, Leaving Chilled Liquid Setpoint should not be set below 20 °F (-6.7 °C).
** Do not exceed 55 °F (12.8 °C) setpoint before contacting the nearest Johnson Controls Office for application
guidelines.
The line under the 0 is the cursor. If the value is wrong,
it may be changed by using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN)
arrow keys until correct. Pressing the ENTER/ADV
key will enter the times and then move the cursor to the
minute box. The operation is then repeated if necessary.
This process may be followed until the hour, minutes,
and meridian (AM or PM) of both the START and STOP
points are set. After changing the meridian of the stop
time, pressing the ENTER/ADV key will advance the
schedule to the next day.
Whenever the daily schedule is changed
for Monday, all the other days will
change to the new Monday schedule.
This means if the Monday times are
not applicable for the whole week
then the exceptional days would need
to be reprogrammed to the desired
schedule.
To page to a specific day, press the SCHEDULE/
ADVANCE DAY key until the desired day appears. The
start and stop time of each day may be programmed
differently using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow, and
ENTER/ADV keys.
After the SUN (Sunday) schedule appears on the display
a subsequent press of the SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY
key will display the Holiday schedule. This is a two part
display. The first reads:
HOL START = 00 : 00 AM
S
T
O
P=0
0:0
0A
M
The times may be set using the same procedure as
described above for the days of the week. After
changing the meridian of the stop time, pressing the
ENTER/ADV key will advance the schedule to the
following display:
S __ MTWTFS
HOLIDAYNOTEDBY *
The line below the empty space next to the S is the
cursor and will move to the next empty space when
the ENTER/ADV key is pressed. To set the Holiday,
the cursor is moved to the space following the day of
the week of the holiday and the ↑ (UP) arrow key is
pressed. An * will appear in the space signifying that
day as a holiday. The * can be removed by pressing the
↓ (DOWN) arrow key.
The Holiday schedule must be programmed weekly
–once the Holiday schedule runs, it will revert to the
normal daily schedule.
156
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
PROGRAM KEY
There are several operating parameters under the
PROGRAM key that are programmable. These setpoints
can be changed by pressing the PROGRAM key, and
then the ENTER/ADV key to enter Program Mode.
Continuing to press the ENTER/ADV key will display
each operating parameter. While a particular parameter
is being displayed, the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow
keys can be used to change the value. After the value is
changed, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to enter
the data into memory. Table 11 shows the programmable
limits and default values for each operating parameter.
The following are the displays for the programmable
values in the order they appear:
d D I SCHARGE PRESSURE
CUTOUT = 5 7 0 PS I G
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
LOW AMBIENT TEMP
CUTOUT = 2 5 . 0 ° F
The LOW AMBIENT TEMP CUTOUT allows the user
to select the chiller outside ambient temperature cutout
point. If the ambient falls below this point, the chiller
will shut down. Restart can occur when temperature rises
2 °F (1.11 °C) above the cutout setpoint.
L EAV I NG L I QU I D T EMP
CUTOUT = 3 6 . 0 ° F
The LEAVING LIQUID TEMP CUTOUT protects
the chiller from an evaporator freeze-up. Anytime the
leaving chilled liquid temperature drops to the cutout
point, the chiller shuts down. Restart will be permitted
when the leaving chilled liquid temperature rises 2 °F
(1.11 °C) above the cutout setpoint.
DISCHARGE PRESSURE CUTOUT is the discharge
pressure at which the system will shutdown as monitored
by the optional discharge transducer. This is a software
shutdown that acts as a backup for the mechanical high
pressure switch located in the refrigerant circuit. The
system can restart when the discharge pressure drops
40 PSIG (2.76 barg) below the cutout point.
When water cooling mode is programmed (OPTIONS
key), the value is fixed at 36.0 °F (2.22 °C) and cannot
be changed. Glycol cooling mode can be programmed
to values listed in Table 11.
If the optional discharge pressure transducer is not
installed, this programmable safety would not apply.
It should be noted that every system has a mechanical
high pressure cutout that protects against excessive
high discharge pressure regardless of whether or not the
optional discharge pressure is installed.
The programmable anti-recycle timer assures that
systems do not short cycle, and the compressor motors
have sufficient time to dissipate heat after a start.
This timer is programmable under the PROGRAM
key between 300 – 600 seconds. Whenever possible,
to reduce cycling and motor heating, the anti-recycle
timer should be adjusted as high as possible. The
programmable anti-recycle timer starts when the first
compressor in a system starts. The timer begins to count
down. If all the compressors in the circuit cycle off,
a compressor within the circuit will not be permitted
to start until the anti-recycle timer has timed out. If
the lead system has run for less than 5 minutes, three
times in a row, the anti-recycle timer will be extended
to 10 minutes, if currently programmed for les than 10
minutes.
SUCT I ON PRESSURE
CUTOUT = 80. 0 PS I G
The SUCTION PRESSURE CUTOUT protects the
chiller from an evaporator freeze-up. If the suction
pressure drops below the cutout point, the system will
shut down. Typically, the cutout should be set to 80 PSIG
(5.52 Bars) from water cooling.
There are some exceptions when the
suction pressure is permitted to temporarily drop below the cutout point.
Details are explained under the topic
of SYSTEM SAFETIES.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
ANT I RECYCLE T I MER
=6
0
0S
E
C
F AN CONTROL ON
P R E S S U R E = X X X P S I G
The Fan Control On-Pressure is the programmed
pressure value that is used to stage the condenser fans
on, in relation to discharge pressure. Refer to Condenser
Fan Control in the “Unit Operation” section of this IOM
and Tables 19, 20, 21 and 22.
157
7
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
F AN D I FFERENT I AL OFF
PR E S S U R E = X X X P S I G
The Fan Differential Off Pressure is the programmed
differential pressure value that is used to stage the
condenser fans off, in relation to discharge pressure.
Refer to Condenser Fan Control in the “Unit Operation”
section of this IOM and Tables 19, 20, 21 and 22.
TOTAL NUMBER OF
COMPRESSORS = 6
The TOTAL NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS is the total
quantity of compressors in the chiller, and determines
the stages of cooling available. Note in Table 12, the
chiller may have single or dual systems. Dual system
units may have 4, 5 or 6 compressors.
This MUST be programmed correctly
to assure proper chiller operation.
NU
M
B
E
R
O
FF
A
N
S
PE
RS
Y
S
T
E
M=
X
The Number of Fans Per System must be programmed as
needed to match the number of fans on each system.
S Y S
U N I T
X T R I P V O L T S
= X. X V O L T S
T R I P
= X. X
V O L T S
V O L T S
Depending on the option, the trip voltage for a
specific system or unit high current trip can be
programmed. It also calibrates the current readout
under the OPER DATA key. The approximate
programmed value is calculated using the following
formulas.
System Trip Volts
For individual system high current trip programming
on chillers:
• Add the sum of the compressor and fan RLA’s in
the system
• Multiply the sum by 1.25
• Divide by 225A
• The resulting voltage is the value that should be
programmed
For example, if fan and compressor RLA’s total 100A:
5V x 100A
625VA
x 1.25=
= 2.8V
225A 225A
The programmed value will be 2.8V. A similar
calculation and programming will be necessary for the
other system in a 2-system chiller.
158
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Unit Trip Volts
For total chiller high current trip programming on
460VAC chillers:
• Add the sum of all the compressor and fan RLA’s
in the chiller.
• Multiply the sum by 1.25
• Divide by 225A
• The resulting voltage is the value that should be
programmed.
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
R
E M O T E U N I T
P R O G R A M M E D =
I D
X
When communications is required with a BAS or
OptiView Panel, individual unit IDs are necessary for
communications with specific chillers on a single RS485 line. Remote Unit ID 0-7 are selectable.
For example, if fan and compressor RLA’s total 180A:
5V x 180A
1125VA
x 1.25=
= 5.0V
225A 225A
The programmed value will be 5.0V.
TABLE 11 – PROGRAM KEY LIMITS AND DEFAULT
PROGRAM VALUE
MODE
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
325 PSIG
575 PSIG
DISCHARGE PRESSURE CUTOUT
—
22.4 BARG
39.6 BARG
80.0 PSIG
120.0 PSIG
WATER COOLING
5.52
BARG
8.27 BARG
SUCTION PRESSURE CUTOUT
42.0 PSIG
70.0 PSIG
GLYCOL COOLING
2.9 BARG
4.83 BARG
25.0 °F
60.0 °F
STANDARD AMBIENT
-3.9 °C
15.6 °C
LOW AMBIENT TEMP. CUTOUT
0 °F
60.0 °F
LOW AMBIENT
-17.8 °C
15.6 °C
—
—
WATER COOLING
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID
DEFAULT
570 PSIG
39.3 BARG
80.0 PSIG
5.52 BARG
44.0 PSIG
3.03 BARG
25.0 °F
-3.9 °C
7
25.0 °F
-3.9 °C
36 °F
2.2 °C
36.0 °F
2.2 °C
600 SEC.
385 PSIG
26.5 BARG
125 PSID
8.62 BARD
3
6
TEMP. CUTOUT
-1.0 °F
36.0 °F
GLYCOL COOLING
-18.3 °C
2.2 °C
ANTI-RECYCLE TIMER
—
300 SEC.
600 SEC.
360 PSIG
485 PSIG
FAN CONTROL ON PRESSURE
—
24.8 BARG
33.4 BARG
80 PSID
160 PSID*
FAN DIFFERENTIAL OFF PRESSURE
—
5.51 BARD
11.03 BARD*
SINGLE SYSTEM
2
3
TOTAL NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS
DUAL SYSTEM
4
6
2 43
NUMBER OF FANS PER SYSTEM
UNIT/SYSTEM TRIP VOLTS
CURRENT FEEDBACK
0.5 Volts
4.5 Volts
2.5 Volts
REMOTE UNIT ID
—
0
7
0
* The minimum discharge pressure allowed is 235 PSIG. The Fan Differential Off Pressure High Limit will be lowered (reduced) to
prevent going below 235 PSIG based on where the fan control On Pressure is programmed.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
159
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
TABLE 12 – SETPOINTS QUICK REFERENCE LIST
Quick Reference Programming Chart
Setpoints Section
Cooling Setpoints Key
(press key to adv.)
Schedule/
Advance Day Key
Program Mode
(press enter to adv.)
Local Leaving
Water Temp Control
(Display Only)
Mon. – Sun.
&
Holiday
Schedule
Discharge
Pressure
Cutout
Chilled Liquid
Setpoint
&
Range
Suction
Pressure
Cutout
Remote Setpoint
&
Range
(Display Only)
Low Ambient Temp.
Cutout
EMS - PWM
Remote Temp
Reset Setpoint
Table 12
16 provides a quick reference of the setpoints list for the Setpoints Keys.
Table
Leaving Liquid
Temperature
Cutout
Anti-Recycle
Timer
Fan Control
On-Pressure
Fan Differential
Off-Pressure
Total Numbers
of
Compressors
Number of
Fans Per System
SYS / Unit
Trip Volts Option
Remote Unit ID
LD07404c
160
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
“UNIT” KEYS
OPTIONS
CLOCK
00070VIP
Options Key
There are many user programmable options under the
OPTIONS key. The OPTIONS key is used to scroll
through the list of options by repeatedly pressing the
OPTIONS key. After the selected option has been
displayed, the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys are then
used to change that particular option. After the option
is changed, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to
enter the data into memory.
Many of the OPTIONS displayed
are only programmable under the
SERVICE MODE and not under the
OPTIONS key. Options only programmable under the SERVICE MODE
are noted in the details describing the
option.
Table 13 shows the programmable options. Following
are the displays in the order they appear:
Option 1 – Language:
D I SP L AY L ANGUAGE
E
N
G
LIS
H
English, Spanish, French, German, and Italian can be
programmed.
Option 2 – System Switches: (two system units
only)
(Single System Display is similar)
SYS1SWITCHON
SYS2SWITCHON
JOHNSON CONTROLS
This allows both systems to run
or
SYS1SWITCHON
SYS2SWITCHOFF
This turns system 2 off
SYS 1 SWI TCH OFF
SYS2SWITCHON
This turns system 1 off
or
SYS 1 SWI TCH OFF
SYS2SWITCHOFF
7
This turns systems 1 & 2 off
Turning a system off with its system
switch allows a pumpdown to be performed prior to shutdown.
Option 3 – Chilled Liquid Cooling Type:
CHILLED LIQUID
W
A
T
E
R
The chilled liquid is water. The Cooling Setpoint can be
programmed from 40 °F to 70 °F (4.4 °C to 21.1 °C)
or
CHILLED LIQUID
G L Y C O L
The chilled liquid is glycol. The Cooling Setpoint can
be programmed from 10 °F to 70 °F (-12.2 °C to 21.1
°C).
161
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
Option 4 – Ambient Control Type:
A M B I E N T C O N T R O L
S T A N D A R D
The low ambient cutout is adjustable from 25 °F to 60 °F
(-3.9 °C to 15.6 °C).
or
AMB I ENT CONTROL
L
O
WA
M
BIE
N
T
The low ambient cutout is programmable down to 0 °F
(-17.8 °C). A low ambient kit MUST be installed for
this option to be chosen. If the kit is NOT installed,
and low ambient is selected, low pressure faults and
compressor damage may occur.
Option 5 – Local/Remote Control Type:
LOCA L / REMOT E MODE L
L
O
C
A
L
When programmed for LOCAL, an ISN or RCC control
can be used to monitor only. The micropanel will operate
on locally programmed values and ignore all commands
from remote devices, or through the RS-485 inputs. The
chiller will communicate and send data to the remote
monitoring devices.
or
LOCA L / REMOT E MODE
R
E
M
O
T
E
This mode should be selected when an ISN or RCC
control is to be used to control the chiller. This mode
will allow the ISN to control the following items:
Remote Start/Stop, Cooling Setpoint, Load Limit, and
History Buffer Request. If the unit receives no valid
ISN transmission for 5 minutes, it will revert back to
the locally programmed values.
Option 6 – Unit Control Mode:
CONTROL MODE
RETURN L I QU I D
Unit control is based on return chilled liquid temperature.
Return Chilled Liquid Control can only be selected on
units that have 4 to 6 compressors (dual system units).
162
CONTROL MODE
LEAVING LIQUID
Unit control is based on leaving chilled liquid temp.
Leaving Chilled Liquid Control can only be selected on
units that have 4 to 6 compressors (dual system units).
Option 7 – Display Units:
D I SPLAY UN I TS
I
M
P
E
RIA
L
This mode displays system operating values in Imperial
units of °F or PSIG.
or
D I SPLAY UN I TS
SI
This mode displays system operating values in Scientific
International Units of °C or barg.
Option 8 – Lead/Lag Type (two system units
only):
L EAD / L AG CONTROL
MANUAL SYS 1 LEAD
SYS 1 selected as lead compressor. SYS 1 lead option
MUST be chosen if Hot Gas Bypass is installed.
or
L EAD / L AG CONTROL
MANUAL SYS 2 LEAD
SYS 2 selected as lead compressor.
or
L EAD / L AG CONTROL
A
U
T
O
M
A
TIC
Lead/lag between systems may be selected to help
equalize average run hours between systems on chillers
with 2 refrigerant systems. Auto lead/lag allows
automatic lead/lag of the two systems based on an
average run hours of the compressors in each system.
A new lead/lag assignment is made whenever all
compressors shut down. The microprocessor board will
then assign the “lead” to the system with the shortest
average run time.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
Option 9 – Condenser Fan Control Mode:
F AN CONTROL
D I SCHARGE PRESSURE
Condenser fans are controlled by discharge pressure
only. This mode must be chosen.
or
F AN CONTROL
AMB I ENT & DSCH PRESS
Do not select this option on R-410A chillers.
Option 10 – Manual Override Mode:
MANUAL OVERR I DE MODE
DIS
A
B
L
E
D
This option allows overriding of the daily schedule
that is programmed. MANUAL OVERRIDE MODE
– DISABLED indicates that override mode has no
effect.
or
MANUAL OVERR I DE MODE
E
N
A
B
L
E
D
Manual Override Mode is enabled. This is a service
function and when enabled, will allow the unit to
start when shut down on the daily schedule. It will
automatically be disabled after 30 minutes.
Option 11 – Current Feedback Options
Installed:
C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K
N O N E
This mode should be selected when the panel is not
equipped with current sensing capability.
or
C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K
O N E P E R U N I T
This mode should be selected when an optional
2ACE Module is installed to allow combined current
monitoring of all systems by sensing current on the
incoming line.
or
JOHNSON CONTROLS
C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K
O N E P E R S Y S T E M
This mode should be selected when an optional
2ACE module is installed to allow individual current
monitoring of each system. SYS 1 input is to J7 of the
I/O. SYS 2 input is to J8 of the I/O.
Option 12 – Power Fail Restart:
P OWER FA I L RESTART
A
U
T
O
M
A
TIC
Chiller auto restarts after a power failure.
P OWER FA I L RESTART
M
A
N
U
A
L
After a power failure, the UNIT switch must be toggled
before restart at the unit is allowed. NORMALLY
MANUAL RESTART should NOT BE SELECTED.
Option 13 – Soft Start Enable/Disable:
S O F T S T A R T
D I S A B L E D
SOFT START “DISABLED” MUST be selected on all
chillers.
This message may not be viewable on non-European
chillers.
Option 14 – Unit Type:
U N I T T Y P E
L I Q U I D C H I L L E R
The UNIT TYPE message cannot be modified under
the unit keys.
“LIQUID CHILLER” must be displayed, or damage to compressors or
other components will occur if operated in the HEAT PUMP or CONDENSING UNIT modes.
If unit type needs to be changed to make the unit a liquid
chiller, remove power and then remove the jumper
between J11-7 and J11-12 on the I/O Board. Reapply
power to the micropanel and the microprocessor will
store the change.
163
7
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
Option 15 – Refrigerant Type:
R E F R I G E R A N T T Y P E
R – 41 0 A
Refrigerant type R-410A must be selected under Service
Mode. Refrigerant type is displayed under the OPTIONS
Key, but is only programmable in Service Mode.
Incorrect programming may cause
damage to compressors.
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
FLASHCARDUPDATE E
N
A
B
L
E
D
Press the ENTER key and the following message will
be displayed until the update has been completed. The
keypad and display will not respond during the update.
DO NOT reset or power down the chiller until the update
is completed.
FLASHCARDUPDATING
P LEASE WA I T . . .
After the update is completed, an automatic reboot will
occur. If an error occurred, the following message will
appear with the error code and no reboot will occur.
Option 16 – Expansion Valve Type:
X P A N S I O N
E
V A L V E
T Y P E
T H E R M O S T A T I C
Expansion valve type, thermostatic or electronic
may be selected under Service Mode. Expansion valve
type is displayed under the OPTIONS key, but is
only programmable in Service Mode. YLAA chillers
will typically always be equipped with thermostatic
expansion valves.
Incorrect programming may cause
damage to compressors.
Also see the UNIT KEYS PROGRAMMING QUICK
REFERENCE LIST in Table 15.
Option 17 – Flash Card Update:
FLASHCARDUPDATE DIS
A
B
L
E
D
A Flash Card is used to input the operating program
into the chiller IPU. A Flash Card is used instead of an
EPROM. Normally, a Flash Card update is not required
and the message above will be displayed.
If the operating software is to be updated, insert the Flash
Card into the Flash Card input port. Turn off the unit
switch and set the Flash Card Update to “ENABLED”
using the ↑ and ↓ keys.
164
FLASHCARDUPDATE ER
R
O
R
XXXXX
If the update resulted in an error, the original program
will still be active. When an error occurs, assure the
correct Flash Card was utilized. Incorrect chiller
software will cause an error. If this is not the case, the
Flash Card is most likely defective or the IPU and I/O
combo board is bad.
Option 18 – Remote Temperature Reset:
R EMOTE TEMP RESET I
N
P
U
T
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Remote Temp Reset input selection is programmable
according to the type of input utilized. The following
options are available:
• DISABLED (default)
• 0.0 – 10.0 (DC)
• 2.0 – 10.0V (DC)
• 0.0 – 20.0 mA
• 4.0 – 20.0 mA
The options display message for Remote Temp Reset Input only appears if
the Temp Reset Option is enabled under Service Mode. The option must be
enabled under the Service Mode for
the Remote Temperature Reset to operate.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
Option 19 – Pump Control:
Option 20 – Pump Selection:
Pump Control is utilized to operate the optional onboard
pump kit or to control an external pump through dry
contacts 23 and 24 on Terminal Block XTBC2. To use
this option, the following selection should be made in
the Service Mode.
The displays for this PUMP SELECTION option should
only appear if “YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS = 2" are
selected under Option 19. Presently, this option should
not be used.
Y
O
R
KH
Y
D
R
O
KITP
U
M
P
S=
1
When YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS = 1, the controls
will be closed to run the pumps whenever any one of
the following conditions are true:
• Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Fault
• Any compressor is running
• Daily Schedule is ON and Remote Stop is
closed.
Even if one of the above conditions are
true, the pump will not run if the
chiller has been powered up for less
than 30 seconds; or if the pump has
run in the last 30 seconds to prevent
pump overheating.
E
X
T
E
R
N
A
L E
V
A
PP
U
M
P
EXTERNAL EVAP PUMP should be selected if an
external pump is being controlled with the chiller pump
contacts. The operation will be the same as YORK
HDRO KIT PUMPS = 1
The following option should not be selected.
Y
O
R
KH
Y
D
R
O
KITP
U
M
P
S=
2
JOHNSON CONTROLS
CLOCK
The CLOCK display shows the current day, time, and
date. Pressing the CLOCK key will show the current
day, time, and date.
It is important that the date and time be correct,
otherwise the daily schedule will not function as desired
if programmed. In addition, for ease of troubleshooting
via the History printouts, the day, time, and date should
be correct.
To change the day, time, and date press the CLOCK
key. The display will show something similar to the
following.
T O D A Y I S FRI 08 : 51AM
25JAN02
The line under the F is the cursor. If the day is correct,
press the ENTER/ADV key. The cursor will move under
the 0 in 08 hours. If the day is incorrect, press the ↑
(UP) or ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys until the desired day is
displayed and then press the ENTER/ADV key at which
time the day will be accepted and the cursor will move
under the first digit of the “2 digit hour”. In a similar
manner, the hour, minute, meridian, month, day, and
year may be programmed, whenever the cursor is under
the first letter/numeral of the item. Press the ↑ (UP) or
↓ (DOWN) arrow keys until the desired hour, minute,
meridian; day, month, and year are displayed. Pressing
the ENTER/ADV Key will save the value and move the
cursor on to the next programmable variable.
165
7
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS
TABLE 13 – UNIT KEYS OPTIONS PROGRAMMING QUICK REFERENCE LIST
Options Key
(press Options Key
to adv.)
Display Language
System Switches
on/off
Expansion Valve Type
(Thermoplastic or Electric)
(Programmed under Service
Mode, Viewable Only)
Must be programmed
for Thermostatic
Flash Card Update
Chilled Liquid Type
(water or glycol)
Ambient Control
(standard or low)
Local/Remote Mode
Remote Temp Reset
Pump Control
Pump Selection
Unit Control Mode
(Return or Leaving)
Display Units
(English or Metric)
System Lead/Lag Control
(Manual or Automatic)
Fan Control Mode
Manual Override Mode
Current Feedback Option
Power Failure Restart
Soft Start Option
Unit Type
(”Chiller” MUST be Selected
Via No Jumper Installed
(Viewable Only)
Refrigerant Type
R-410A
(Programmed under Service Mode)
Viewable Only)
Table 13 provides a quick reference list for the Unit key setpoints.
166
LD07405d
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
CAPACITY CONTROL
To initiate the start sequence of the chiller, all run
permissive inputs must be satisfied (flow/remote start/
stop switch), and no chiller or system faults should
exist.
The first phase of the start sequence is initiated by the
Daily Schedule Start or any Remote Cycling Device. If
the unit is shut down on the daily schedule, the chilled
water pump contacts (Terminals 23 and 24 of XTBC2)
will close to start the pump when the daily schedule start
time has been reached. Once flow has been established
and the flow switch closes, capacity control functions are
initiated, if the remote cycling contacts wired in series
with the flow switch are closed.
It should be noted that the chilled water pump contacts
(Terminals 23 and 24 of XTBC2) are not required to
be used to cycle the chilled water pump. However, in
all cases the flow switch must be closed to allow unit
operation.
The control system will evaluate the need for cooling
by comparing the actual leaving or return chilled liquid
temperature to the desired setpoint, and regulate the
leaving or return chilled liquid temperature to meet that
desired setpoint.
SUCTION PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS
The anticipatory controls are intended to prevent the
unit from ever actually reaching a low-pressure cutout.
Loading is prevented if the suction pressure drops below
1.15 x suction pressure cutout (15% below the cutout).
Loading may reoccur after suction pressure rises above
the unload point and a period of one minute elapses. This
control is only operable if the optional suction pressure
transducers are installed.
DISCHARGE PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS
The discharge pressure limit controls unload a system
before it reaches a safety limit due to high load or dirty
condenser coils. The microprocessor board monitors
discharge pressure and unloads a system, if fully loaded,
by one compressor when discharge pressure exceeds
the programmed cutout minus 10 PSIG (0.69 barg).
Reloading will occur when the discharge pressure on
the affected system drops to 85% of the unload pressure
and 10 minutes have elapsed.
This control is only applicable if optional discharge
pressure transducers are installed.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL
The setpoint, when programmed for Leaving Chilled
Liquid Control, is the temperature the unit will control
to within plus or minus the (control) cooling range. The
Setpoint High Limit is the setpoint plus the cooling
range. The Setpoint Low Limit is the setpoint minus
the cooling range. Fig. 58 should be utilized to aid in
understanding the following description of Leaving
Chilled Liquid Control.
If the leaving chilled liquid temperature is above the
Setpoint High Limit, the lead compressor on the lead
system will be energized along with the liquid line
solenoid. Upon energizing any compressor, the 60
second Anti-Coincidence timer will be initiated to
prevent multiple compressors from turning on.
If after 60 seconds of run-time the leaving chilled liquid
temperature is still above the Setpoint High Limit,
the next compressor in sequence will be energized.
Additional compressors will be energized at a rate of
one every 60 seconds, if the chilled liquid temperature
remains above the Setpoint High Limit and the chilled
liquid temperature is dropping less than 3 °F (-16.1°C/
per minute. The lag system will not be allowed to
start a compressor until the lead system has run for 5
minutes.
If the chilled liquid temperature falls below the Setpoint
High Limit, but is greater than the Setpoint Low Limit,
loading and unloading will not occur. This area of control
is called the control range.
If the chilled liquid temperature drops to between the
Setpoint Low Limit and 0.5 °F (.28 °C) below the
Setpoint Low Limit, unloading (a compressor turns off)
occurs at a rate of one every 30 seconds. If the chilled
liquid temperature falls to a value greater than 0.5 °F
(.28 °C) below the Setpoint Low Limit but not greater
than 1.5 °F (-16.9 °C) below the Setpoint Low Limit,
unloading occurs at a rate of 20 seconds. If the chilled
liquid temperature falls to a value greater than 1.5 °F
(-16.9 °C) below the Setpoint Low Limit, unloading
occurs at a rate of 10 seconds. If the chilled liquid
temperature falls below 1 °F above the low chilled
liquid temperature cutout, unloading occurs at a rate of
10 seconds if it is greater than 10 seconds.
In water cooling mode on R-410A chillers, the minimum
low limit of the control range will be 40.0 ºF (4.4 ºC). For
leaving chilled liquid temperature setpoint and control
range combinations that result in the low limit of the
control range being below 40.0ºF (4.4 ºC), the low limit
will be reset to 40.0ºF (4.4 ºC) and the difference will
167
8
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
be added to the high limit. This will result in a control
range the same size as programmed but not allow the
unit to run below 40.0ºF (4.4 ºC). This control will not
affect glycol chillers.
Hot gas, if present, will be the final step of capacity.
Hot gas is energized when only a single compressor
is running and Leaving Water Temperature is less than
setpoint. Hot gas is turned off as temperature rises
when Leaving Water Temperature is more than setpoint,
plus the control range divided by two. If temperature
remains below the setpoint low limit on the lowest step
of capacity, the microprocessor board will close the
liquid line solenoid, after turning off hot gas, and pump
the system down before turning off the last compressor
in a system.
The leaving chilled liquid setpoint is programmable
from 40 °F to 70 °F (4.4 °C to 21.1 °C) in water chilling
mode and from 10 °F to 70 °F (-12.2 °C to 21.1 °C) in
glycol chilling mode. In both modes, the cooling range
can be from +/-1.5 °F to +/-2.5 °F (+/-.83 °C to 1.39
°C).leaving chilled liquid control
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL
OVERRIDE TO REDUCE CYCLING
To avoid compressor cycling the microprocessor board
will adjust the setpoint upward temporarily. The last run
time of the system will be saved. If the last run time was
greater than 5 minutes, no action is to be taken. If the
last run time for the lead system was less than 5 minutes,
the microprocessor will increase the setpoint high limit,
with a maximum value allowed of 50 °F (10 °C) (See
Fig. 59).
If adding the setpoint adjust value to the setpoint high
limit causes the setpoint high limit to be greater than 50
°F, the setpoint high limit will be set to 50 °F, and the
difference will be added to the setpoint low limit.
Once a system runs for greater than 5 minutes, the
setpoint adjust will be set back to 0. This will occur
while the system is still running.
30 sec.
unloading
Control Range
(no compressor staging)
60 sec.
loading
44.0 °F46.0 °F48.0°
LWT
(6.7 °C)(7.8 °C)(8.9 °C)
Low Limit
Setpoint
High limit
SETPOINT ADJUST (DEG. F)
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
LAST RUN TIME OF LEAD SYSTEM (MINUTES)
FIG. 59 – SETPOINT ADJUST
LD11415
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/LAG
AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING
A Lead/Lag option may be selected to help equalize
average run hours between systems with 2 refrigerant
systems. This may be programmed under the OPTIONS
key. Auto Lead/Lag allows automatic Lead/Lag of
the two systems based on average run hours of the
compressors in each system. Manual Lead/Lag selects
specifically the sequence which the microprocessor
board starts systems.
On a hot water start, once a system starts, it will turn on all
compressors before the next system starts a compressor.
The microprocessor will sequence compressors within
each circuit to maximize individual compressor run time
on individual compressors within a system to prevent
short cycling.
Each compressor in a system will be assigned an
arbitrary priority number 1, 2, or 1, 2, 3. The non-running
compressor within a system with the lowest priority
number will always be the next compressor to start. The
running compressor with priority number 1 will always
be the next to shut off. Whenever a compressor is shut
off, the priority numbers of all compressors will be
decreased by 1 with wrap-around. This control scheme
assures the same compressor does not repeatedly cycle
on and off.
Once the second system starts a compressor on a 2
system chiller, the microprocessor board will attempt
to equally load each system as long as the system is not
limiting or pumping down. Once this occurs, loading and
unloading will alternate between systems, loading the
lead system first or unloading the lag system first.
Leaving Water Temp. Control – Compressor Staging
Setpoint = 46.0 °F (7.8 °C) Range = +/- 2 °F(1.1 °C)
FIG. 58 – L
EAVING WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL EXAMPLE
168
JOHNSON CONTROLS
Unit FORM
Operation
150.72-NM3 (811)
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
As an example of compressor staging (refer to Table 14),
a chiller with six compressors using a Cooling Setpoint
programmed for 45 °F (7.20 °C) and a Range Setpoint
of 10 °F (5.56 °C). Using the formulas in Table 15, the
control range will be split up into six (seven including
hot gas) segments, with the Control Range determining
the separation between segments. Note also that the
Cooling Setpoint is the point at which all compressors
are off, and Cooling Setpoint plus Range is the point
all compressors are on. Specifically, if the return water
temperature is 55 °F (12.8 °C), then all compressors
will be on, providing full capacity. At nominal gpm, this
would provide approximately 45 °F (7.2 °C) leaving
water temperature out of the evaporator.
RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL
(Can be used on Dual System 4, 5 & 6 Comp
Units Only)
Return chilled liquid control is based on staging the
compressors to match the cooling load. The chiller will
be fully loaded when the return water temperature is
equal to the Cooling Setpoint plus the Range. The chiller
will be totally unloaded (all compressors off) when the
return water temperature is equal to the Cooling Setpoint
(See sample in Table 14). At return water temperatures
between the Cooling Setpoint and Cooling Setpoint
plus Range, compressor loading and unloading will be
determined by the formulas in Table 15.
If the return water temperature drops to 53.4 °F (11.9
°C), one compressor would cycle off leaving five
compressors running. The compressors would continue
to cycle off approximately every 1.7 °F (.94 °C), with
the exception of hot gas bypass. Notice that the hot
gas bypass would cycle on when the return water
temperature dropped to 46.25 °F (7.9 °C). At this point
one compressor would be running with hot gas.
Return Chilled Liquid Control MUST
only be used when constant chilled
liquid flow is ensured.
The RANGE MUST always be programmed to equal the temperature
drop across the evaporator when the
chiller is “fully loaded”. Otherwise,
chilled liquid temperature will over or
under shoot. Variable flow must never
be used in return chilled liquid mode.
Should the return water temperature rise from this
point to 46.7 °F (8.2 °C), the hot gas bypass would shut
off, still leaving one compressor running. As the load
increased, the compressors would stage on every 1.7
°F (.94 °C).
Normal loading will occur at intervals of 60 seconds
according to the temperatures determined by the formulas.
Unloading will occur at a rate of 30 seconds according
to the temperatures determined in the formulas used
to calculate the on and off points for each step of
capacity.
Also note that Table 15 not only provides the formulas
for the loading (ON POINT) and unloading (OFF
POINT) of the system, the “STEP” is also shown in the
tables. The “STEP” is the increment in the sequence of
the capacity control scheme that can be viewed under
the OPER DATA key. Refer to the section in this IOM
on DISPLAY/PRINT keys for specific information on the
OPER DATA key.
The return chilled liquid setpoint is programmable from
40 °F to 70 °F (4.4 °C to 21.1 °C) in water chilling mode
and from 10 °F to 70 °F (-12.2 °C to 21.1 °C) in glycol
chilling mode. In both modes, the cooling range can be
from 4 °F to 20 °F (2.2° to 11.1 °C).
TABLE 14 – SAMPLE COMPRESSOR STAGING FOR RETURN WATER CONTROL
Compressor Staging for Return Water Control
4 Compressor
Cooling Setpoint = 45 °F (7.2 °C) Range = 10 °F(5.6 °C)
# of Comp ON
0
* 1+HG
1
2
3
4
RWT
45 °F
(7.2 °C)
46.25 °F
(7.9 °C)
47.5 °F
(8.6 °C)
50.0 °F
(10.0 °C)
52.5 °F
(11.4 °C)
55.0 °F
(12.8 °C)
*Unloading only
JOHNSON CONTROLS
169
8
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
TABLE 15 – RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS)
*STEP 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
COMPRESSOR
0
1 W/HGB
1 NO HGB
2
2
3
4
COMPRESSOR ON POINT
COMPRESSOR OFF POINT
SETPOINT
SETPOINT
SP + CR/8 (Note 1)
SETPOINT
SP + CR/4
SP + CR/8
SP + 2*CR/4 (Note 2)
SP + CR/4
SP + 2*CR/4
SP + CR/4 (Note 3) SP + 3*CR/4
SP + 2*CR/4
SP + CR
SP + 3*CR/4
Notes:
1. Step 1 is Hot Gas Bypass and is skipped when loading occurs. Hot Gas Bypass operation is inhibited during Pumpdown.
2. Step 3 is skipped when loading occurs.
3. Step 4 is skipped when unloading occurs.
* STEP can be viewed using the OPER DATA key and scrolling to COOLING DEMAND.
RETURN CHILLLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/
LAG AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING
A lead/lag option may be selected to help equalize
average run hours between systems with two refrigerant
systems. This may be programmed under the OPTIONS
key. Auto Lead/Lag of the two systems based on average
run hours of the compressors in each system. Manual
Lead/Lag specifically selects the sequence in which the
microprocessor board starts the systems.
The microprocessor board will sequence compressors
load and unload systems according to Table 16. The
microprocessor will lead/lag compressors within each
circuit to maximize individual compressor run time
for the purpose of lubrication. It will also prevent the
same compressor from starting two times in a row. The
microprocessor board will not attempt to equalize run
time on individual compressors within a system.
Each compressor in a system will be assigned an
arbitrary number 1 or 2. The non-running compressor
within a system with the lowest priority number will
always be the next compressor to start. The running
compressor with priority number 1 will always be the
next compressor to shut off. Whenever a compressor is
shut off, the priority numbers of all compressors in each
system will be decreased by 1 with the wrap around.
This control scheme assures the same compressor does
not repeatedly cycle on and off.
TABLE 16 – RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS)
LEAD SYSTEM
LAG SYSTEM
Step
COMP 1
COMP 2
-
COMP 1
COMP 2
-
0
OFF
OFF
-
OFF
OFF
-
1
ON + HG
OFF
-
OFF
OFF
-
2
ON
OFF
-
OFF
OFF
-
3
ON
OFF
-
See NOTE 2
ON
OFF
-
4
ON
ON
-
See NOTE 3
OFF
OFF
-
5
ON
ON
-
ON
OFF
-
6
ON
ON
-
ON
ON
-
See NOTE 1
NOTES
1. Step is Hot Gas Bypass and is skipped when loading occurs. Hot Gas Bypass operation is inhibited during pumpdown. For Leaving Chilled Liquid Control the Hot Gas Bypass solenoid is energized only when the lead compressor is running and the LWT < SP, the Hot Gas Bypass
solenoid is turned off when the LWT > SP + CR/2.
1. Step 1 is not used for loading or unloading.
2. Step 3 is skipped when loading occurs.
3. Step 4 is skipped when unloading occurs.
170
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
ANTI-RECYCLE TIMER
The programmable anti-recycle timer assures that
systems do not cycle. This timer is programmable
under the PROGRAM key between 300 – 600 seconds.
Whenever possible, to reduce cycling and motor heating,
the anti-recycle timer should be adjusted to 600 seconds.
The programmable anti-recycle timer starts the timer
when the first compressor in a system starts. The timer
begins to count down. If all of the compressors in a
circuit cycle off, a compressor within the circuit will
not be permitted to start until the anti-recycle timer
has timed out. If the lead system has run for less than 5
minutes, 3 times in a row, the anti-recycle timer will be
extended to 10 minutes.
ANTI-COINCIDENCE TIMER
This timer is not present on single-system units. Two
timing controls are present in software to assure
compressors within a circuit or between systems, do not
start simultaneously. The anti-coincidence timer assures
there is at least a one minute delay between system starts
on 2-circuit systems. This timer is NOT programmable.
The load timers further assure that there is a minimum
time between compressor starts within a system.
EVAPORATOR PUMP CONTROL & YORK
HYDRO KIT PUMP CONTROL
The evaporator pump dry contacts (XTBC2 – terminals
23 – 24) are energized when any of the following
conditions are true:
1.Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Fault
2.Any compressor is running
3.Daily Schedule is ON, Unit Switch is ON and
Remote Stop is closed.
The pump will not run if the micropanel has been
powered up for less than 30 seconds or if the pump
has run in the last 30 seconds to prevent pump motor
overheating.
Whenever the option “YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS
= 1" is selected under the OPTIONS key, the pump
control will be as described above. DO NOT SELECT
the option “YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS = 2" under
the OPTIONS key. If a dual pump option is installed,
the active pump is selected by the selector switch.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
EVAPORATOR HEATER CONTROL
The evaporator heater is controlled by ambient air
temperature. When the ambient temperature drops
below 40 °F (4.4 °C) the heater is turned on. When the
temperature rises above 45 °F (7.2 °C) the heater is turned
off. An under voltage condition will keep the heater off
until full voltage is restored to the system.
PUMPDOWN CONTROL
Each system has a pump-down feature upon shut-off.
Manual pumpdown from the keypad is not possible. On
a non-safety, non-unit switch shutdown, all compressors
but one in the system will be shut off. The LLSV will
also be turned off. The final compressor will be allowed
to run until the suction pressure falls below the cutout, or
for 180 seconds, whichever comes first.
STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL
Condenser fan operation must be programmed with the
OPTIONS key under “Fan Control.” Condenser fan must
be selected for Discharge Pressure only. Fan control by
discharge pressure will work according to the tables on
the following pages. The fan control on-pressure and
fan differential off-pressure are programmable under the
PROGRAM key. Standard fan control operates down
to a temperature of 25° F (-3.9° C).
The delay between turning on and off fan stages is
always fixed at 5 seconds.
When a fan stage is turned on by pressure, the on
pressure for the next stage is increased 20 PSIG and
ramped back to the programmed on pressure over the
next 20 seconds. Typically, standard ambient control
ON pressure should be programmed at 385 PSIG with
a differential of 125 PSIG.
When a fan stage is turned off (programmed on pressure
minus programmed differential), the off pressure for the
next stage is decreased 20 PSIG and ramped back to the
programmed off pressure minus the differential over the
next 20 seconds.
Condenser fan locations are shown in Fig. 60. Detailed
Standard Fan Control operation is shown in Table 17
and 18.
171
8
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
LD13244
FIG. 60 – CONDENSER FAN LOCATIONS WIRING DIAGRAMS
172
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
TABLE 17 – YLAA STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL USING DISCHARGE PRESSURE ONLY
(2, 3, OR 4 FANS PER SYSTEM)
FAN
STAGE
1
2
3
ON*
OFF**
IPUII I/O OUTPUT
FAN
CONTACTOR
FAN #
SYS 1
SYS 2
SYS 1
SYS 2
SYS 1
SYS 2
DP > PROGRAMMED
FAN CONTROL ON
PRESSURE
DP < PROGRAMMED
FAN CONTROL ON
PRESSURE MINUS
PROGRAMMED
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
7B7-8
TB10-8
1-KF1
2-KF1
1-MF1
2-MF2
DP > PROGRAMMED
FAN CONTROL
ON PRESSURE &
FAN STAGE 1 IS
ENERGIZED
DP < PROGRAMMED
FAN CONTROL ON
PRESSURE MINUS
PROGRAMMED
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE &
FAN STAGE 1 IS
ENERGIZED
TB7-8 &
TB7-9
TB10-8 &
TB10-9
1-KF1 &
1-KF2
2-KF1 &
2-KF2
1-MF1 &
1-MF2
2-MF1 &
2-MF2
DP > PROGRAMMED
FAN CONTROL ON
PRESSURE AND FAN
STAGES 1 & 2 ARE
ENERGIZED
DP < PROGRAMMED
FAN CONTROL ON
PRESSURE MINUS
PROGRAMMED
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE & FAN
STAGES 1 & 2 ARE
ENERGIZED
2-KF1 &
2-KF2 &
2-KF3
3 FAN:
1-MF1 &
1-MF2 &
1-MF3
4 FAN:
1-MF1 &
1-MF2 &
1-MF3 &
1-MF4
3 FAN:
2-MF1
& 2-MF2
& 2-MF3
4 FAN:
2-MF1 &
2-MF2 &
2-MF3 &
2-MF4
TB7-8 &
TB7-9 &
TB7-10
TB10-8 &
TB10-9 &
TB10-10
1-KF1 &
1-KF2 &
1-KF3
* When a fan stage is turned on, the pressure for the next stage is increased 20 PSIG and ramped back to the
programmed on pressure over the next 20 seconds.
** When a fan stage is turned off (Programmed ON pressure minus the differential), the OFF pressure for the next
stage is decreased 20 PSIG and ramped back to the programmed OFF pressure minus the differential.
The time delay (fan delay timer) between turning fan stages on and off is
fixed at 5 seconds.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
173
8
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
TABLE 18 – YLAA STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL USING DISCHARGE PRESSURE ONLY
(5 OR 6 FANS PER SYSTEM)
FAN
STAGE
1
ON*
OFF**
DP >
PROGRAMMED
FAN CONTROL
ON PRESSURE
DP <
PROGRAMMED
FAN CONTROL
ON PRESSURE
MINUS
PROGRAMMED
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
2
DP <
PROGRAMMED
DP >
FAN CONTROL
PROGRAMMED ON PRESSURE
FAN CONTROL
MINUS
ON PRESSURE & PROGRAMMED
FAN STAGE 1 IS DIFFERENTIAL
ENERGIZED
PRESSURE &
FAN STAGE 1
IS ENERGIZED
3
DP <
PROGRAMMED
DP >
FAN CONTROL
PROGRAMMED ON PRESSURE
FAN CONTROL
MINUS
ON PRESSURE PROGRAMMED
AND FAN
DIFFERENTIAL
STAGES 1 & 2
PRESSURE &
ARE ENERGIZED
FAN STAGES
1 & 2 ARE
ENERGIZED
IPUII I/O OUTPUT
FAN CONTACTOR
SYS 1
SYS 2
SYS 1
SYS 2
SYS 1
SYS 2
TB7-8
TB10-8
1-KF1
2-KF1
1-MF1
2-MF1
TB7-8 &
TB7-9
TB10-8 &
TB10-9
1-KF1 &
1-KF2
2-KF1 &
2-KF2
1-MF1 &
1-MF2 &
1-MF3
2-MF1 &
2-MF2 &
2-MF3
2-KF1 &
2-KF2 &
2-KF3
5 FAN:
1-MF1 &
1-MF2 &
1-MF3 &
1-MF4 &
1-MF5
6 FAN:
1-MF1 &
1-MF2 &
1-MF3 &
1-MF4 &
1-MF5&
1-MF6
5 FAN:
1-MF1 &
1-MF2 &
1-MF3 &
1-MF4 &
1-MF5
TB7-8 &
TB7-9 &
TB7-10
TB10-8 &
TB10-9 &
TB10-10
1-KF1 &
1-KF2 &
1-KF3
FAN #
* When a fan stage is turned on, the pressure for the next stage is increased 20 PSIG and ramped back to the
programmed on pressure over the next 20 seconds.
** When a fan stage is turned off (Programmed ON pressure minus the differential), the OFF pressure for the next
stage is decreased 20 PSIG and ramped back to the programmed OFF pressure minus the differential.
The time delay (fan delay timer) between turning fan stages on and off is
fixed at 5 seconds.
174
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
LOAD LIMITING
Load Limiting is a feature that prevents the unit
from loading beyond the desired value. Two and four
compressor units can be load limited to 50%. This would
allow only one compressor per system to run. Three and
six compressor units can be load limited to 33% or 66%.
The 66% limit would allow up to two compressors per
system to run, and the 33% limit would allow only one
compressor per system to run. Five-compressor units
may be load limited to 40% (one compressor per system
runs) or 80% (up to 2 compressors per system). No other
values of limiting are available.
There are two ways to load limit the unit. The first is
through remote communication via an ISN. Load limit
stages are sent through YORK Talk on pages 9 and 10
of feature 54. Page 9 is stage 1 load limit and page 10
is stage 2 load limit.
A second stage of load limiting the unit is accomplished
by closing contacts connected to the Load Limit
(XTBC1 – terminals 13-21) and PWM inputs (XTBC1
– terminals 13-20). Stage 1 of load limiting involves
closing the Load Limit input. Stage 2 of load limiting
involves closing both the Load Limit and PWM inputs.
The first stage of limiting is either 80%, 66% or 50%,
depending on the number of compressors on the unit.
The second stage of limiting is either 40% or 33% and
is only available on 3, 5 & 6 compressor units. Table
19 shows the load limiting permitted for the various
numbers of compressors.
Simultaneous operation of Remote
Load Limiting and EMS-PWM Temperature Reset (described on following
pages) cannot occur.
COMPRESSOR RUN STATUS
Compressor run status is indicated by closure of contacts
at XTBC2 – terminals 25 to 26 for system 1 and XTBC2
– terminals 27 to 28 for system 2.
ALARM STATUS
System or unit shutdown is indicated by normally-open
alarm contacts opening whenever the unit shuts down on
a unit fault, locks out on a system fault, or experiences
a loss of power to the chiller electronics . System 1
alarm contacts are located at XTBC2 – terminals 29 to
30. System 2 alarm contacts are located at XTBC2 –
terminals 31 to 32. The alarm contacts will close when
conditions allow the unit to operate, or the fault is reset
during a loss of power, the contacts will remain open
until power is reapplied and no fault conditions exist.
TABLE 19 – COMPRESSOR OPERATION –
LOAD LIMITING
COMPRESSORS
IN UNIT
2
3
4
5
6
JOHNSON CONTROLS
STAGE 1
STAGE 2
50%
66%
50%
80%
66%
33%
40%
33%
8
175
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
BAS/EMS TEMPERATURE RESET USING
A VOLTAGE OR CURRENT SIGNAL
The Remote Reset Option allows the Control Center
of the unit to reset the chilled liquid setpoint using a
0 ‑ 10VDC input, or a 4‑20mA input connected to
XTBC1 terminals A- and A+. Whenever a reset is called
for, the change may be noted by pressing the Cooling
Setpoints key twice. The new value will be displayed
as “REM SETP = XXX °F.”
If a 4‑20mA signal is supplied, it is applied to terminals
A+ and A‑ and jumper JP1 on the I/O board must be
installed between pin 1 and 2. To calculate the chilled
liquid setpoint for values between 4mA and 20 mA use
the following formula:
If a 0 ‑ 10VDC signal is supplied, it is applied to
terminals A+ and A‑, and jumper JP1 on the I/O board
must be inserted between pins 2 and 3. To calculate
the reset chilled liquid setpoint for values between 0VDC
and 10VDC use the following formula:
°Reset = (mA signal ‑ 4) x (*Max Reset Value)
16
Example:
Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint = 45° (7.22 °C)
*Max Reset Value = 10 °F (5.56 °C)
Input Signal = 12 mA
Setpoint = Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint + °Reset
(English)
°Reset = 8mA x 10 °F = 5 °F Reset
16
Setpoint = 45 °F + 5 °F = 50 °F
°Reset = (DC voltage signal) x (*Max Reset Value)
10
Example:
Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint = 45 °F (7.22 °C)
*Max Reset Value = 20 °F (11.11 °C)
Input Signal = 6VDC
(English)
°Reset = 6VDC x 20 °F = 12 °F Reset
10
New Setpoint = 45 °F + 12 °F = 57 °F
Setpoint = Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint + °Reset
(Metric)
°Reset = 8mA x 5.56 °C = 2.78 °C Reset
16
Setpoint = 7.22 °C + 2.78 °C = 10.0 °C
A 240-24V Ratio Transformer (T3)
is used to derive nominal 12V output
from the 120V supply.
(Metric)
°Reset = 6VDC x 11. 11 °C = 6.67 °C Reset
10
New Setpoint = 7.22 °C + 6.67 °C = 13.89 °C
* Max Reset Value is the “Max EMS‑PWM Remote Temp. Reset” setpoint
value described in the program­ming section under Cooling Setpoints.
Programmable values are from 2 °F to 40 °F (1.11 °C to 11.11
°C).
176
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CLEARING HISTORY BUFFERS
The history buffers may be cleared by pressing the
HISTORY key and then repeatedly pressing the UP
arrow key until you scroll past the last history buffer
choice. The following message will be displayed:
I I N I T I AL I ZE H I STORY
E
N
T
E
R=Y
E
S
Pressing the ENTER/ADV key at this display will cause
the history buffers to be cleared. Pressing any other key
will cancel the operation.
DO NOT CLEAR BUFFERS. Important information may be lost. Contact
factory service.
SERVICE MODE
Service Mode is a mode that allows the user to enable
or disable all of the outputs (except compressors) on the
unit, change chiller configuration setup parameters and
view all the inputs to the microboard.
To enter Service Mode, turn the Unit Switch off and press
the following keys in the sequence shown; PROGRAM,
UP ARROW, UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW, DOWN
ARROW, ENTER. Service Mode will time out after 30
minutes and return to normal control mode, if the panel is
accidentally left in this mode. Otherwise, turning the unit
switch on will take the panel out of Service Mode.
SERVICE MODE – OUTPUTS
After pressing the key sequence as described, the
control will enter Service Mode permitting the outputs
(except compressors), operating hours, refrigerant
type, expansion valve type, and start/hour counters to
be viewed/modified. The ENTER/ADV key is used to
advance through the outputs. Using the ↑ and ↓ (UP/
DOWN ) arrow keys will turn the respective digital
output on/off or modify the value.
The following is the order of outputs that will appear as
the ENTER/ADV key is pressed:
SYS 1 COMP 1 STATUS TB7-2 IS:
SYS 1 LLSV STATUS TB7-3 IS:
SYS 1 COMP 2 STATUS TB7-4 IS:
JOHNSON CONTROLS
SYS 1 COMP 3 STATUS TB7-5 IS:
SYS 1 HGBP STATUS TB7-7 IS:
SYS 2 COMP 1 STATUS TB10-2 IS:
SYS 2 LLSV STATUS TB10-3 IS:
SYS 2 COMP 2 STATUS TB10-4 IS:
SYS 2 COMP 3 STATUS TB10-5 IS:
SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 1 TB7-8 IS:
SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 2 TB7-9 IS:
SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 3 TB7-10 IS:
SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 1 TB10-8 IS:
SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 2 TB10-9 IS:
SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 3 TB10-10 IS:
EVAP HEATER STATUS TB8-2 IS:
SYS 1 ALARM STATUS TB8-3 IS:
SYS 2 ALARM STATUS TB9-2 IS:
EVAP PUMP STATUS TB8-6,7 IS:
SYS 2 HGBV STATUS TB10-7 IS:
SPARE DO TB8-4 IS:
SPARE DO TB8-5 IS:
SPARE DO TB8-8, 9 IS:
SPARE DO TB9-4 IS:
SYS 1 EEV OUTPUT TB5-1, 2 = XXX%
SYS 2 EEV OUTPUT TB6-1, 2 = XXX%
SYS 1 COND FAN SPEED J15-1,5 = XXX%
SYS 2 COND FAN SPEED J15-2,6 = XXX%
SPARE AO J15-3,7 = XXX%
SPARE AO J15-4,8 = XXX%
DATA LOGGING MODE 1 = ON, 0 = OFF
DATA LOGGING TIMER X SECS
SOFT START (disabled)
REFRIGERANT TYPE (R410A only)
EXPANSION VALVE TYPE (Thermostatic Only)
REMOTE TEMP RESET OPTION =
REMOTE INPUT SERVICE TIME =
“NORTH AMERICAN FEATURE SET ENABLED”
HYDRO PUMP SELECTION
EVAP PUMP TOTAL RUN HOURS
SYS 1 HOURS
SYS 2 HOURS
SYS 1 STARTS
SYS 2 STARTS
Each display will also show the output connection on
the microboard for the respective output status shown.
For example:
SYS1LLSVSTATUS
T
B
10
-3ISO
F
F
This display indicates that the system 1 liquid line
solenoid valve is OFF, and the output connection from
the microboard is coming from Terminal Block 10 –
pin 3.
177
9
Section 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Pressing the ↑ (UP) arrow key will energize the liquid
line solenoid valve and “OFF” will change to “ON”
in the display as the LLSV is energized. Energizing
and de-energizing outputs may be useful during
troubleshooting.
SERVICE MODE – CHILLER CONFIGURATION
After the Outputs are displayed, the next group of
displays relate to chiller configuration and start/hour
counters. Data logging, soft start, refrigerant type, pump
control selection and expansion valve type all must be
programmed to match actual chiller configuration.
Soft start (disabled), Refrigerant Type
(R410A), and Expansion Valve Type
(Thermostatic), and North American
Feature (Enabled) MUST be properly
programmed or damage to compressors and other system components
may result.
The following is a list of chiller configuration selections,
in order of appearance:
DATA LOGGING MODE = : DO NOT MODIFY
DATA LOGGING TIMER = : DO NOT MODIFY
SOFT START
REFRIGERANT TYPE
EXPANSION VALVE TYPE
REMOTE TEMP RESET OPTION
REMOTE INPUT SERVICE TIME
FEATURE SET
PUMP CONTROL SELECTION
SYS 1 HOURS
SYS 2 HOURS
SYS 1 STARTS
SYS 2 STARTS
The last displays shown on the above list are for the
accumulated run and start timers for each system. All
values can also be changed using the ↑ (UP) and ↓
(Down) arrow keys, but under normal circumstances
would not be required or advised. After the last start
display, the microprocessor board will display the first
programmable value under the PROGRAM key.
178
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SERVICE MODE – ANALOG & DIGITAL
INPUTS
After entering Service Mode (PROGRAM ↑↑ ↓↓), all
digital and analog inputs to the microboard can be viewed
by pressing the OPER DATA key. After pressing the
OPER DATA key, the ↑ (UP) arrow and ↓ (DOWN)
arrow keys are used to scroll through the analog and
digital inputs.
Following is the order of analog and digital inputs that
will appear when sequenced with the ↓ (Down) arrow
key:
(analog inputs)
SYS 1 SUCT PRESSURE
UNIT TYPE
SYS 1 *DISCH PRESSURE
SYS 1** SUCTION TEMP.
SYS 2** SUCTION TEMP.
AMBIENT AIR TEMP.
LEAVING LIQUID TEMP.
RETURN LIQUID TEMP.
SYS 2 SUCTION PRESSURE
SYS 2 SPARE
SYS 2 *DISCH PRESSURE
SYS 1 MTR VOLTS
SYS 2 MTR VOLTS
(digital inputs)
PWM TEMP RESET INPUT
LOAD LIMIT INPUT
FLOW SW / REM START
SPARE
SINGLE SYSTEM SELECT
SYS 1 MP / HPCO INPUT
SYS 2 MP / HPCO INPUT
* The discharge pressure transducer is optional on some models.
** The suction temp. sensor is on EEV units only.
The analog inputs will display the input connection,
the temperature or pressure, and corresponding input
voltage such as:
SYS1SUCTPRJ7-10
2.1VDC=81PSIG
This example indicates that the system 1 suction pressure
input is connected to plug 7 – pin 10 (J7-10) on the I/O
board. It indicates that the voltage is 2.1 VDC which
corresponds to 81 PSIG (5.6 bars) suction pressure.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
The digital inputs will display the input connection and
ON/OFF status such as:
FLO
WSW/REMSTART
J
13
-5ISO
N
This indicates that the flow switch/remote start input is
connected to plug 13- pin 5 (J13-5) on the microboard,
and is ON (ON = +30VDC unregulated input, OFF =
0VDC input on digital inputs).
CONTROL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Tables 20 through 23 are a quick reference list providing
the connection points and a description of the inputs and
outputs respectively. All input and output connections
pertain to the connections at the microboard.
TABLE 20 – I/O DIGITAL INPUTS
J13-2
Unit ON/OFF Switch
J13-3
Load Limit Stage 2 on 3, 5 & 6 Comp. Units
J13-4
Load Limit Stage 1
J13-5
Flow Switch and Remote Start/Stop
J13-6
Spare
J13-7
Single System Select
(Jumper = Single Sys, No Jumper = Two Sys)
J13-8
CR1
(Sys 1 Motor Protector/High Pressure Cutout)
J13-10
CR2
(Sys 2 Motor Protector/High Pressure Cutout)
Section 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLE 21 – I/O DIGITAL OUTPUTS
TB7-2
SYS 1 Compressor 1
TB7-3
SYS 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
TB7-4
SYS 1 Compressor 2
TB7-5
SYS 1 Compressor 3
TB7-7
SYS 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
TB10-2
SYS 2 Compressor 1
TB10-3
SYS 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
TB10-4
SYS 2 Compressor 2
TB10-5
SYS 2 Compressor 3
TB7-8
SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 1
TB7-9
SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 2
TB7-10
SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 3
TB10-8
SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 1
TB10-9
SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 2
TB10-10
SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 3
TB8-2
Evaporator Heater
TB8-3
SYS 1 Alarm
TB9-2
SYS 2 Alarm
TB8-6 & 7 Evaporator Pump Starter
TB10-7
SYS 2 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
TABLE 22 – I/O ANALOG INPUTS
J7-10
SYS 1 Suction Transducer
-orSYS 1 Low Pressure Switch
Unit Type: Chiller = NO Jumper J11-12 to +24 VDC
J11-12 YCUL Condensing Unit = Jumper J11-12 to +24 VDC
(Do NOT Use)
J7-11
SYS 1 Discharge Pressure Transducer (Optional)
J6-9
Ambient Air Temp. Sensor
J6-7
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp. Sensor
J6-8
Return Chilled Liquid Temp. Sensor
J9-10
SYS 2 Suction Pressure Transducer
-orSYS 2 Low Pressure Switch
J9-11
SYS 2 Discharge Pressure Transducer
(Optional)
J7-12
Unit/SYS 1 Voltage
J9-12
SYS 2 Voltage
9
J11-11 Remote Temperature Reset
TABLE 23 – I/O ANALOG OUTPUTS
N/A
JOHNSON CONTROLS
Not Applicable
179
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
TB6
TB5
I/O BOARD
J15
TB1
TB7
J3
TB8
J5
IPU
BOARD
TB9
J6
J7
J8
TB10
J9
J10
J14
J13
J12
J11
JP1
LD12721
FIG. 61 – MICROBOARD LAYOUT
180
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
CHECKING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Digital Inputs
Refer to the unit wiring diagram. All digital inputs are
connected to J13-1 of the I/O board. The term “digital”
refers to two states – either on or off. As an example,
when the flow switch is closed, 30VDC will be applied
to J13, pin 5 (J13-5) of the I/O board. If the flow switch
is open, 0VDC will then be present at J13-5.
Pin 1 of J13 is an unregulated 30VDC source used to
supply the DC voltage to the various user contacts, unit
switch, flow switch, etc. This DC source is factory wired
to XTBC1, terminal 13. Any switch or contact used as a
digital input would be connected to this terminal, with
the other end connecting to its respective digital input on
the microboard. Any time a switch or contact is closed,
30VDC would be applied to that particular digital input.
Any time a switch or contact is open, 0VDC would be
applied to that particular digital input.
Typically, voltages of 24 – 36VDC could be measured
for the DC voltage on the digital inputs. This voltage
is in reference to ground. The unit case should be
sufficient as a reference point when measuring digital
input voltages.
Analog Inputs – Temperature
Refer to the unit wiring diagram. Temperature inputs are
connected to the microboard on plug J6. These analog
inputs represent varying DC signals corresponding to
varying temperatures. All voltages are in reference to
the unit case (ground). Following are the connections
for the temperature sensing inputs:
Section 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLE 24 – OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR
TEMPERATURE/VOLTAGE/
CORRELATION
TEMP °F
VOLTAGE
(Signal Input
to Return)
TEMP °C
0
0.7
-18
5
0.8
-15
10
0.9
-12
15
1.0
-9
20
1.1
-7
25
1.2
-4
30
1.4
-1
35
1.5
2
40
1.7
4
45
1.8
7
50
2.0
10
55
2.2
13
60
2.3
16
65
2.5
18
70
2.6
21
75
2.8
24
80
2.9
27
85
3.1
29
90
3.2
32
95
3.4
35
100
3.5
38
105
3.6
41
110
3.7
43
115
3.8
46
120
3.9
49
Outside Air Sensor
125
4.0
52
J6-6 = +5VDC regulated supply to sensor.
J6-9 = VDC input signal to the microboard.
See Table 24 for voltage readings that corre-
spond to specific outdoor temperatures.
J6-3 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC) Return
130
4.1
54
JOHNSON CONTROLS
9
181
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLE 25 – ENTERING/LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID
TEMP. SENSOR, TEMPERATURE/
VOLTAGE CORRELATION
182
Liquid & Refrigerant Sensor Test Points
(Table 25)
Entering Chilled Liquid Sensor
TEMP °F
VOLTAGE
(Signal Input
to Return)
TEMP °C
10
1.33
-12
12
1.39
-11
14
1.46
-10
16
1.51
-9
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Sensor
18
1.58
-8
20
1.65
-7
22
1.71
-6
24
1.78
-4
26
1.85
-3
J6-4 = +5VDC regulated supply to sensor.
J6-7 = VDC input signal to the microboard. See Table 25 for voltage readings that correspond to specific liquid temperatures.
J6-1 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC) Return
28
1.91
-2
30
1.98
-1
32
2.05
0
34
2.12
1
36
2.19
2
38
2.26
3
40
2.33
4
42
2.40
6
44
2.47
7
46
2.53
8
48
2.60
9
50
2.65
10
52
2.73
11
54
2.80
12
56
2.86
13
58
2.92
14
60
2.98
16
62
3.05
17
64
3.11
18
66
3.17
19
68
3.23
20
70
3.29
21
72
3.34
22
74
3.39
23
76
3.45
24
78
3.5
26
80
3.54
27
J6-5 = +5VDC regulated supply to sensor.
J6-8 =VDC input signal to the I/O board. See Table 25 for voltage readings that correspond
to specific liquid temperatures.
J6-2 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC) Return
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Analog Inputs – Pressure
TEST POINTS:
Suction Pressure:
System 1: ...........................Microboard J7-10 to J7-9
System 2: ...........................Microboard J9-10 to J9-9
Discharge Pressure:
...........................
System 1:
Microboard J7-11 to J7-7
...........................
System 2:
Microboard J9-11 to J9-7
Refer to the unit wiring diagram. Pressure inputs
are connected to the microboard on plugs J7 and J9.
These analog inputs represent varying DC signals
corresponding to varying pressures. All voltages are in
reference to the unit case (ground).
System 1 discharge and suction pressures will be
connected to J7 of the microboard. System 2 discharge
and suction pressure transducers will be connected to
J9 of the microboard.
The discharge transducers are optional on all units. If the
discharge transducers are not installed, no connections
are made to the microboard and the discharge pressure
readout on the display would be zero.
The suction pressure transducers are standard on all
YLAA’s. The suction pressure transducers have a range
of 0 to 400 PSIG. The output will be linear from 0.5VDC
to 4.5VDC over the 400 PSIG (27.5 barg) range.
The discharge transducers have a range from 0 to 650
PSIG. The output will be linear from 0.5VDC to 4.5VDC
over the 600 PSIG (41.25 barg) range. The following is
the formula that can be used to verify the voltage output
of the transducer. All voltage reading are in reference to
ground (unit case).
TABLE 26 – PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
0-400 PSIG SUCTION
PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
0-600 PSIG DISCHARGE
PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
PRESSURE
PSIG
VOLTAGE
VDC
PRESSURE
PSIG
VOLTAGE
VDC
0
0.5
0
0.5
50
1.0
75
1.0
100
1.5
150
1.5
150
2.0
225
2.0
200
2.5
300
2.5
250
3.0
375
3.0
300
3.5
450
3.5
350
4.0
525
4.0
400
4.5
600
4.5
V = (Pressure in PSIG x .01) + .5
or
V = (Pressure in BARG x .145) + .5
where V = dc voltage output
Pressure = pressure sensed by transducer
The I/O board connections for the Discharge
Transducers:
System 1 Discharge Transducer
J7-6 = +5VDC regulated supply to transducer.
J7-11 = VDC input signal to the microboard. See the formula above for voltage readings that correspond to specific discharge pressures.
J7-7 = +5VDC return
J7-2 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC)
System 2 Discharge Transducer
J9-6 = +5VDC regulated supply to transducer.
J9-11 =VDC input signal to the microboard. See the formula above for voltage readings that correspond to specific discharge pressures.
J9-7 = +5VDC return
J9-2 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC)
9
RED WIRE = 5V, BLACK WIRE = 0V, WHITE/GREEN WIRE = SIGNAL
JOHNSON CONTROLS
183
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
The suction transducers have a range from 0 to 400 PSIG
(27.5 barg). The output will be linear from 0.5VDC
to 4.5VDC over the 400 PSIG (27.5 barg) range. The
following is a formula that can be used to verify the
voltage output of the transducer. All voltage reading are
in reference to ground (unit case).
V = (Pressure in PSIG x .02) + .5
or
V = (Pressure in barg x .29) + .5
where V = dc voltage input to microprocessor board
Pressure = pressure sensed by transducer
The f ollowing are the I/O board connections for the
Suction Transducer:
System 1 Suction Transducer
J7-5 = +5VDC regulated supply to transducer.
J7-10 = VDC input signal to the microboard.
See the formula above for voltage readings that correspond to specific suction pressures.
J7-9 = +5VDC return
J7-1 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC)
Digital Outputs
Refer to the unit wiring diagram and Fig. 62. The digital
outputs are located on TB7, TB8, and TB9 and TB-10 of
the microboard. ALL OUTPUTS ARE 120VAC with the
exception of TB8-6 to TB8-7 which are the contacts that
can be used for a remote evaporator pump start signal.
The voltage applied to either of these terminals would
be determined by field wiring.
Each output is controlled by the microprocessor by
switching 120VAC to the respective output connection
energizing contactors, evaporator heater, and solenoids
according to the operating sequence (see Fig. 62).
120VAC is supplied to the I/O board via connections
at TB7-1, TB7-6, TB10-1, TB10-6, TB8-1 and TB9-1.
Fig. 62 illustrates the relay contact architecture on the
microboard.
SYS 1
COMP 1
TB7-3
LLSV 1
TB7
TB7-5
SYS 1
COMP 2
SYS 1
COMP 3
TB7-7
SYS 1
HGSV
TB7-4
System 2 Suction Transducer
J9-5 = +5VDC regulated supply to transducer.
J9-10 = VDC input signal to the microboard.
See the formula above for voltage readings that correspond to specific suction pressures.
J7-9 = +5VDC return
J7-11 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC)
TB7-2
TB7-8
TB7
TB7-9
SYS 1
FAN 2
SYS 1
FAN 1
SYS 1
TB7-10 FAN 3
SYS 2
TB10-2 COMPR 1 (4)
TB10-3 LLSV 2
TB10
SYS 2
TB10-4 COMPR 2 (5)
SYS 2
TB10-5 COMPR 3 (6)
SYS 2
TB10-7 HGSV
TB10-8
TB10
TB10-9 SYS 2
FAN 2
SYS 2
TB10-10 FAN 4
TB8-6
TB8
TB8-7
EVAP
PUMP
TB8-2
HEAT EXCH
HEATER
LD12722
FIG. 62 – I/O BOARD RELAY CONTACT
ARCHITECTURE
184
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
OPTIONAL PRINTER INSTALLATION
The micropanel is capable of supplying a printout of
chiller conditions or fault shutdown information at any
given time. This allows operator and service personnel
to obtain data and system status with the touch of
the keypad. In addition to manual print selection,
the micropanel will provide an automatic printout
whenever a fault occurs. Detailed explanation of the
print function is given under “Print Key” located in the
“Keypad and Display” section of this IOM.
Johnson Controls recommends the field tested WEIGHTRONIX model 1220 printer (or former IMP 24). This
is a compact low cost printer that is ideal for service
work and data logging.
The WEIGH-TRONIX printer can be obtained by
contacting WEIGH-TRONIX for purchase information
at:
WEIGH-TRONIX
2320 Airport Blvd.
Santa Rosa, CA 95402
Phone: 1-800-982-6622 or 1-707-527-5555
(International Orders Only)
The part number for the printer that is packaged
specifically for YORK is P/N 950915576. The cable
to connect the printer can either be locally assembled
from the parts listed, or ordered directly from WEIGHTRONIX under part number 287-040018.
Parts
The following parts are required:
1.One WEIGH-TRONIX model 1220 printer.
2.2.25" (5.7cm) wide desk top calculator paper.
3.25 ft. (7.62m) maximum length of Twisted Pair
Shielded Cable (minimum 3 conductor), #18 AWG
stranded, 300V minimum insulation.
4.One 25-pin Cannon connector and shell.
Connector: Cannon P/N DB-25P or equivalent.
Shell: Cannon P/N DB-C2-J9.
Assembly and Wiring
All components should be assembled and wired as
shown in Fig. 63. Strip the outside insulation back
several inches and individual wires about 3/8" (9.5 mm)
to connect the cable at the Microboard. Do not connect
the shield at the printer-end of the cable.
Obtaining a Printout
A printout is obtained by pressing the “PRINT” key on
the keypad and then pressing either the “OPER DATA”
key or “HISTORY” key.
Printer
Chiller Microboard
TB3
TB3-3 TXD
2 RD
TB3-2 CTS
5 CTS
TB3-5 GND
7 SG
Shield (connect shield to Pin 5
of the connector.
9
Do not connect shield
at printer end.
LD12723
FIG. 63 – PRINTER TO MICROBOARD ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
JOHNSON CONTROLS
185
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLE 27 – TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM
CAUSE
SOLUTION
No display on panel.
1.No 115VAC to 24 VAC
1a. Check wiring and fuse
Unit will not operate. Transformer 1FU
b.Check wiring emergency
stop contacts 5 to L of XTBC2 Terminal Block.
c. Replace Control Transformer
2.No 24VAC to Microboard
2.Check wiring Control
Transformer to Microboard.
3.Control Transformer defective, no 3. Replace Control Transformer
24VAC output.
4.Short in wire to temp. sensors
4.Unplug connections at IPU II
or pressure transducers. & I/O Board to isolate.
5.Defective IPU II & I/O Board
or the Display Board.
5.Replace IPU II & I/O Board or the Display Board.
Contact Johnson
Controls Service before replacing
circuit boards!
“FLOW SWITCH/REM
1.No chilled liquid flow.
1.Check chilled liquid flow.
STOP NO RUN PERMISSIVE”
2.Flow switch improperly
2.Check that the flow switch
installed. is installed according to
manufacturer’s
instructions.
3.Defective flow switch.
3.Replace flow switch.
4.Remote cycling device open.
4.Check cycling devices
connected to terminals
13 and 14 of the XTBC1
Terminal Block.
“LOW SUCTION PRESSURE”
1.Improper suction pressure
1.Adjust per recommended
FAULT
cutouts adjustments.settings.
2.Low refrigerant charge.
2.Repair leak if necessary
and add refrigerant.
186
3.Fouled filter dryer.
3.Change dryer/core.
CONT’D
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT’D)
PROBLEM
CAUSE
SOLUTION
“LOW SUCTION PRESSURE”
4.TXV defective.
4.Replace TXV.
FAULT (CONT’D)
5.Reduced flow of chilled
5. Check GPM (See “Limita
tions” liquid through the
cooler in Installation section). Check operation of pump, clean pump strainer, purge chilled liquid system of air.
6.Defective suction pressure
6.Replace transducer/low
transducer/low pressure pressure switch or faulty
switch or wiring. wiring. Refer to “Service”
section for pressure/voltage
formula.
7.LLSV defective
7. Replace LLSV
“HIGH DISCHARGE
1.Condenser fans not operating
1.Check fan motor,
PRESSURE” FAULT or operating backwards. and contactors. Assure fan blows air upward.
2.Too much refrigerant.
2.Remove refrigerant.
3.Air in refrigerant system.
3.Evacuate and recharge
system.
4.Defective discharge
4.Replace discharge pressure
pressure transducer.transducer. Refer to Service
section for pressure/voltage
formula.
9
“LOW LIQUID TEMP”
1.Improperly adjusted leaving
1.Re-program the leaving
FAULT
chilled liquid temp. cutout chilled liquid temp. cutout.
(glycol only).
2.Micropanel setpoint/range
values improperly programmed.
2.Re-adjust setpoint/range.
3.Chilled liquid flow too low.
3.Increase chilled liquid flow – refer to Limitations in Instal-
lation section.
4.Defective LWT or RWT sensor
4.Compare sensor against a
(assure the sensor is properly known good temperature
installed in the bottom of the well sensing device. Refer to
with a generous amount of heat) Service section for temp./
conductive compound). voltage table.
CONT’D
JOHNSON CONTROLS
187
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT’D)
PROBLEM
CAUSE
SOLUTION
“MP / HPCO” FAULT
1.Compressor internal motor
1.Verify refrigerant charge is
protector (MP) open. not low. Verify superheat setting of °10 – 15 °F (5.6° – 8.3 °C). Verify correct com-
pressor rotation. Verify compressor is not over
loaded.
2.External overload tripped.
2.Determine cause and reset.
3.HPCO switch open.
3.See “High Press. Disch.”
Fault.
4.Defective HPCO switch.
4.Replace HPCO switch.
5.Defective CR relay.
5.Replace relay.
COMPRESSOR(S) WON’T
1.Demand not great enough.
1.No problem. Consult
START“Installation” Manual to aid
in understanding compres-
sor operation and capacity control.
2.Defective water temperature
2.Compare the display with a
sensor. thermometer. Should be within +/- 2 degrees. Refer
to Service section for RWT/
LWT temp./voltage table.
3.Contactor/Overload failure.
3.Replace defective part.
4.Compressor failure.
4.Diagnose cause of failure
and replace.
LACK OF COOLING EFFECT
1.Fouled evaporator surface.
1.Contact the local Johnson
Low suction pressure will Controls service be observed.representative.
2.Improper flow through the
2.Reduce flow to within chiller
evaporator.design specs. See Limita-
tions in Installation section.
3.Low refrigerant charge.
3.Check subcooling and add
Low suction pressure will charge as needed.
be observed.
188
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE
It is the responsibility of the equipment owner to provide
maintenance on the system.
IMPORTANT
If system failure occurs due to improper maintenance
during the warranty period, Johnson Controls will
not be liable for costs incurred to return the system to
satisfactory operation. The following is intended only as
a guide and covers only the chiller unit components. It
does not cover other related system components which
may or may not be furnished by Johnson Controls.
System components should be maintained according to
the individual manufacture’s recommendations as their
operation will affect the operation of the chiller.
COMPRESSORS
Oil Level check
The oil level can only be tested when the compressor is
running in stabilized conditions, to ensure that there is
no liquid refrigerant in the lower shell of the compressor.
When the compressor is running at stabilized conditions,
the oil level must be between 1/4 and 3/4 in the oil sight
glass.
At shutdown, the oil level can fall to
the bottom limit of the oil sight glass.
Use YORK “V” oil when adding oil.
CONDENSER COILS
Dirt should not be allowed to accumulate on the
condenser coil surfaces. Cleaning should be as often as
necessary to keep coils clean.
Exercise care when cleaning the coil
so that the coil fins are not damaged.
OPERATING PARAMETERS
Regular checks of the system should be preformed to
ensure that operating temperatures and pressures are
within limitations, and that the operating controls are
set within proper limits. Refer to the “Unit Operation”,
“Commissioning”, and “Installation” sections of this
manual.
ON-BOARD BATTERY BACK-UP
U5 is the Real Time Clock chip located on the 03102630 IPU II board that maintains the date/time and
stores customer programmed setpoints. The Real Time
Clock is a 128K bram, P/N 031-02565-000. The IPU
II board must have JP1 installed when the 128K bram
is installed.
Do not confuse JP1 on the IPU II (03102630) board with JP1 on the I/O
(031-02550) board.
Oil Analysis
The oil used in these compressors is pale yellow in color
(POE oil). If the oil color darkens or exhibits a change in
color, this may be an indication of contaminants in the
refrigerant system. If this occurs, an oil sample should
be taken and analyzed. If contaminants are present, the
system must be cleaned to prevent compressor failure.
Never use the scroll compressor to pump
the refrigerant system down into a vacuum. Doing so will cause internal arcing
of the compressor motor which will result in failure of compressor.
CONDENSER FAN MOTORS
Condenser fan motors are permanently lubricated and
require no maintenance.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGER
(EVAPORATOR) HEATER
The Plate and Frame Heat Exchanger
(evaporator) heater is 120VAC. Disconnecting 120VAC power from the
unit, at or below freezing temperatures, can result in damage to the
evaporator and unit as a result of the
chilled liquid freezing.
OVERALL UNIT INSPECTION
In addition to the checks listed on this page, periodic
overall inspections of the unit should be accomplished
to ensure proper equipment operation. Items such as
loose hardware, component operation, refrigerant leaks,
unusual noises, etc. should be investigated and corrected
immediately.
189
10
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
MICROCHANNEL COIL CLEANING
The coil cleaning procedure for microchannel coils is
significantly different than tube and fin type coils. As
such, care must be taken to understand the differences
to avoid damage to the microchannel coil. These
differences require a number of DO NOT’s that must
be observed:
• DO NOT use coil cleaners or any chemical on a
microchannel coil. This can cause severe damage
to the coils.
• DO NOT use a pressure washer to clean the coils.
While it is possible to clean a coil with a pressure
washer, it’s also possible to destroy it.
• DO NOT contact the coil with a hard surface such
as a hose nozzle or metal vacuum nozzle or any
other tool.
190
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Follow the three steps below for cleaning the coils:
1. Remove surface debris such as dirt, leaves, insects, fibers, etc. with a vacuum cleaner having
a soft attachment rather than a metal tube. Compressed air blown from the inside out can also be
used. When brushing debris off the face of the
coil a soft bristle (not wire) brush can be used.
Do not scrape the coil with the vacuum nozzle,
air nozzle, or any other tool.
2. Rinse the coil with tap water. Do not use coil
cleaners. Rinse the coil from the inside out, running water through every passage in the heat
exchanger surface until it is clean. Use a gentle
spray from a spray nozzle with a plastic end or
put your finger on the end of the spray nozzle to
reduce impact and provide a gentle spray.
3. Because of the fin geometry, microchannel coils
retain water more than tube and fin style. It is
generally recommended to blow or vacuum out
the rinse water from the coils to speed drying and
prevent water pooling.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
BACNET, MODBUS AND YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS
Data can be read and in some cases modified using a
serial communication BACnet, Modbus or YorkTalk
2 network connection. This information allows
communications of chiller operating parameters and
external control changes to setpoint, load limiting, and
start/stop commands.
BACnet and YorkTalk 2 RS485 networks are wired to
the + and - terminals of TB1 for port 1 communications.
Modbus network connection has the option of RS232 or
RS485 connection for port 2 communications. Modbus
network is wired to either TB2 or TB3 as follows:
• RS-485: connect to TB2 - Network (-1) to TB2
(-1); Network (+1) to TB2 (+1)
• RS-232: connect to TB3 - Network (RX) to TB3
(TXD); Network (TX) to TB3 (RXD); Network
(GND) to TB3 (GND)
Refer to Fig. 64 “Micropanel Connections” for TB1,
TB2 and TB3 locations.
In most cases, communication parameters will need
to be modified. Table 29 “Values Required for BAS
Communication” lists setup parameters for the available
protocols. Modification is accomplished by pressing
the PROGRAM, DOWN ARROW, DOWN ARROW,
DOWN ARROW, DOWN ARROW, and ENTER keys
in sequence. The list below shows the displays for the
values that may be modified:
P2 PROTOCOL
DE MODIFIER ADDRESS
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXX
P2 MANUAL MAC
DE MODIFIER OFFSET
XX
ADDRESS
P2 BAUD RATE
P1 PROTOCOL
XXXXX
XXXXXX
P2 PARITY
P1 MANUAL MAC
ADDRESS
XXX
XXXXX
XXX
P2 STOP BITS
P1 BAUD RATE
X
XXXXX
P2 HW SELECT BIT
P1 PARITY
XXXXX
XXXXX
REAL TIME ERROR
P1 STOP BITS
X
##
10
RESET 1 = YES, 0 = NO 0
Note: See Table 30 for error descriptions
JOHNSON CONTROLS
191
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
035-02550-xxx I/O Board
FIG. 64 – MICROPANEL CONNECTIONS
The table below shows the minimum, maximum, and default values.
TABLE 28 – MINIMUM, MAXIMUM AND DEFAULT VALUES
DESCRIPTION
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
DEFAULT
DE MODIFIER ADDRESS
-1
41943
-1
DE MODIFIER OFFSET
-1
99
-1
P1 BAUD RATE
1200
76800
4800
P2 BAUD RATE
1200
1200, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800, AUTO SELECTABLE
57600
1200
1200, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 SELECTABLE
P1, P2 MANUAL MAC
ADDRESS
-1
127
-1
P1, P2 PARITY
NONE
IGNORE
NONE
NONE, EVEN, ODD, IGNORE SELECTABLE
P1 PROTOCOL
BACNET
API
BACNET
BACNET, API SELECTABLE
P2 PROTOCOL
TERMINAL
MODBUS CLIENT
API
TERMINAL, MODBUS IO, MODBUS SERVER, API, MODBUS CLIENT SELECTABLE
P1, P2 STOP BITS
1
2
1
RESET REAL TIME ERROR
NO
YES
NO
192
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
The table below shows set-up requirements for each communication protocol.
TABLE 29 – VALUES REQUIRED FOR BAS COMMUNICATION
PROTOCOL
SETTING DESCRIPTION
BACNET MS/TP
DE MODIFIER ADDRESS
0 TO 41943
DE MODIFIER OFFSET
0 TO 99
MODBUS RTU5
YORKTALK 2
1
-1
0
N/A
(3)
(4)
P1 PROTOCOL
BACNET
N/A
N/A
P1 MANUAL MAC ADDRESS
0-127(1)
N/A
N/A
P1 BAUD RATE
9600 TO 76800 OR AUTO
SELECTABLE(1)
N/A
N/A
P1 PARITY
NONE
N/A
N/A
P1 STOP BITS
1
N/A
N/A
P2 PROTOCOL
N/A
MODBUS SVR
P2 MANUAL MAC ADDRESS
N/A
0-127
P2 BAUD RATE
N/A
19,200(2)
N/A
P2 PARITY
N/A
NONE
N/A
(1)
(2)
N/A
N/A
P2 STOP BITS
N/A
1
N/A
P2 HW SELECT BIT
N/A
RS-485 OR RS-232(1)
N/A
RESET REAL TIME ERROR
N/A
N/A
N/A
P1 HW SELECT BIT
N/A
N/A
N/A
CHILLER ID
N/A
N/A
0
AS REQUIRED BY NETWORK
OR OTHER AS REQUIRED BY NETWORK
3
NUMBER IS MULTIPLIED BY 100, SET AS REQUIRED BY NETWORK
4
NUMBER IS ADDED TO DE MODIFIER ADDRESS, SET AS REQUIRED BY NETWORK
5
UNIT OPERATING SOFTWARE VERSION C.MMC.13.03 OR LATER REQUIRED FOR MODBUS PROTOCOL
1
2
NOTE: REBOOT REQUIRED (CYCLE POWER) AFTER SETTINGS ARE CHANGED.
The table below shows the real time error numbers that may be encountered during communication setup and a
description of each.
TABLE 30 – REAL TIME ERROR NUMBERS
JOHNSON CONTROLS
ERROR NUMBER
(##)
DESCRIPTION
0
ALL OK
1
DATUM TYPE OK TEST FAILED
2
ENGLISH TEXT TOO LONG
3
FLOATING POINT EXCEPTION
4
GET PACKET FAILED
5
GET TYPE FAILED
6
INVALID UNIT CONVERSION
7
INVALID HARDWARE SELECTION
8
REAL TIME FAULT
9
SPANISH TEXT TOO LONG
10
THREAD EXITED
11
THREAD FAILED
12
THREAD STALLED
13
IO BOARD RESET
14
BRAM INVALID
15
BACNET SETUP FAILED
10
193
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
BACnet and Modbus Communications
Chiller data that can be read and modified using
specific BACnet or Modbus Register Addresses; and
the data associated with the addresses, is outlined in the
following description:
ANALOG WRITE POINTS
This data can be read and modified using a BACnet or
Modbus network connection. The Modbus Register
Address for these points is 1025 + AV #.
BINARY WRITE POINTS
This data can be read and modified using a BACnet or
Modbus network connection. The Modbus Register
Address for these points is 1537 + BV #.
ANALOG READ ONLY POINTS
This data can be read using a BACnet or Modbus
network connection and can NOT be modified using
this connection. The Modbus Register Address for these
points is 513 + AI #.
BINARY MONITOR ONLY POINTS
This data can be read using a BACnet or Modbus
network connection and can NOT be modified using
this connection. The Modbus Register Address for these
points is 1281 + BI #.
Communications Data Map Notes:
(See Table 31)
1. I PU II based units are configured for Native BACnet
MS/TP and Modbus RTU communications.
Microgateway or E-Link not required for these
two communication protocols.
2. BACnet
Object Types: 0= Analog In, 1 =
Analog Out, 2= Analog Value, 3= Binary In, 4 = Binary Output, 5= Binary Value,
8= Device, 15 = Alarm Notification (0 -127 are
reserved ASHRAE Objects).
3. W
C= Inches of water column; CFM = Cubic Feet
per Minute; FPM = Feet per Minute: PSI = Lbs
per square inch; Pa = Pascals; kPa = Kilopascals;
PPM = Part per Million; kJ/kg = Kilojoules per
Kilogram.
4. Water Cooled Scroll units use the same firmware
as Air Cooled Scroll units, ignoring Fan Control.
Refer to Table 31 for complete list of BACnet and
Modbus registers.
The latest data map information is
listed on the Johnson Controls Equipment Integration website.
194
JOHNSON CONTROLS
JOHNSON CONTROLS
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1538
1539
1540
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
AV_1
AV_2
AV_3
AV_4
AV_5
AV_6
AV_7
BV_1
BV_2
BV_3
ANALOG WRITE POINTS
REM_SETP
SP_REM_SP_S1
LOAD_LIMIT
REM_CR
SP_REM_SP_S2
ANALOG READ ONLY POINTS
LCHLT
AI_1
RCHLT
AI_2
DAT
AI_3
S1_SUCT_TEMP
AI_4
OAT
AI_5
S1_SUCT_SHEAT
AI_6
S1_RUN_TIME
AI_7
S1_SUCT_PR
AI_8
S1_DSCH_PR
AI_9
S1_CIR_TEMP
AI_10
S1_DEF_TEMP
AI_11
S1_EEV_OUT
AI_12
S1_AR_TIMER
AI_13
AC_TIMER
AI_14
S2_SUCT_TEMP
AI_15
S2_RUN_TIME
AI_16
S2_SUCT_PR
AI_17
S2_DSCH_PR
AI_18
S2_CIR_TEMP
AI_19
S2_DEF_TEMP
AI_20
S2_SUCT_SH
AI_21
S2_AR_TIMER
AI_22
S2_EEV_OUT
AI_23
SS_SYS2
15
Mid Market Native Bacnet_Modbus
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
SS_SYS1
BINARY WRITE POINTS
START_STOP
REM_SP_HEAT
HP_MODE
MODBUS
ADDRESS
BACnet
Object/Inst
ance
BACnet NAME
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
F°
F°
F°
F°
F°
F°
seconds
PSIG
PSIG
F°
F°
F°
seconds
seconds
°F
seconds
PSIG
PSIG
F°
F°
F°
F°
seconds
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
F°
index
F°
PSIG
index
F°
PSIG
SEE NOTE 5
ENG UNITS
Native
Check Sum
Comments
Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
READ
WRITE
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp
Return Chilled Liquid Temp
Condensing Unit Models Only
Electronic Expansion Valve Models Only
Ambient Air Temperature
Sys 1 Suction Superheat ( EEV Models Only)
Sys 1 Run Time (seconds)
Sys 1 Suction Pressure
Sys 1 Discharge Pressure
Sys 1 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temp (R-407c Models Only)
Sys 1 Defrost Temperature (HP Only)
System 1 EEV Output % ( EEV Models Only)
Sys 1 Anti-Recycle Timer
Anti-Coincident Timer
System 2 Suction Temp ( EEVModels Only)
Sys 2 Run Time (seconds)
Sys 2 Suction Pressure
Sys 2 Discharge Pressure
Sys 2 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temperature(R-407c Only)
Sys 2 Defrost Temperature (HP Only)
Sys 2 Suction SuperHeat (EEV Models Only)
Sys 2 Anti-Recycle Timer
Sys 2 Suction Superheat ( EEV Models Only)
Sys 2 Start/Stop ( Suction Pressure (SP) Control Only)
Sys 1 Start/Stop ( Suction Pressure (SP) Control Only)
Stop Start Command
Heating Setpoint (HP Only), 999 = Auto (95°F - 122°F)
Mode (HP Only) (0=Panel, 1=Cooling, 2=Heating)
Setpoint Cooling
Setpoint(HP Only), 99 = Auto; (40°F - 70°F)
Sys 1 Setpoint (Suction Pressure Control units only)
Load Limit Stage (0, 1, 2)
Cooling Range (DAT Mode Only)
Sys 2 Setpoint (Suction Pressure Control)
SEE NOTE 1
POINT DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
Page 1 of 3
6
9
S=Standard; O = Optional; N = Not Available
Point List Code
Standard with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
Basildon with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
MMHP with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
Basildon MMHP with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
Standard Micro Board 031-02550-xxx . Fix native Modbus communications. Fix Café Metric functionality (SCR-766)
MMHP with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550Fix native Modbus communications. Fix Café Metric functionality (SCR-766)
Basildon MMHP with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550 Fix native Modbus communications. Fix Café Metric functionality (SCR-766)
Modbus and BACnet MS/TP Data Maps
Property of JCI/York International. Subject to change without notice
Middle Market IPU II NATIVE BACnet _Modbus Data Maps_ Rev A_06.xls
01,03,05,15,06,
16
01,03,05,15,06,
16
01,03,05,15,06,
03,06,16
03,06,16
03,06,16
03,06,16
03,06,16
03,06,16
03,06,16
Type Supported
MODBUS Data
York PN
031-02755-001
031-02755-002
031-02755-003
031-02755-004
031-02755-001
031-02755-003
031-02755-004
Date
29-Nov-06
29-Nov-06
29-Nov-06
29-Nov-06
17-Oct-08
17-Oct-08
17-Oct-08
Version
C.MMC.13.00
C.MMC.15.00
C.MMC.14.00
C.MMC.16.00
C.MMC.13.02
C.MMC.14.02
C.MMC.16.02
13
14
12
10
11
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
3
ITEM REF
NUM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ITEM
YCAL/YCUL/YCWL/YLAA IPU II
2/25/2009
10
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
TABLE 31 - BACNET AND MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP
10
Continued on next page
195
196
Continued on next page
JOHNSON CONTROLS
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
AI_34
AI_35
AI_36
AI_37
AI_38
AI_39
AI_40
AI_41
AI_42
AI_43
AI_44
AI_45
AI_46
AI_47
AI_48
AI_49
AI_50
AI_51
AI_52
AI_53
AR_TIME
LCHLT_CUT
LOW_AMB_CUT
SUCT_P_CO_HT
L_SUCT_P_CO
H_DSCH_P_CO
COOL_SETP
SP_SETP_S1
CONTROL_RG
SP_CTL_RG_S1
SP_SETP_S2
HEAT_SETP
SP_CTL_RG_S2
HEAT_RANGE
S1_DSCH_TEMP
S1_DSCH_SHEAT
S2_DSCH_TEMP
S2_DSCH_SH
LEAVING_HOT
BINARY MONITOR ONLY POINTS
S1_ALARM
BI_1
S2_ALARM
BI_2
EVAP_HTR
BI_3
EVAP_PUMP
BI_4
S1_C1_RUN
BI_5
S2_C1_RUN
BI_6
S1_LLSV
BI_7
S1_MODE_SV
BI_8
S1_HGBV
BI_9
S1_BHS
BI_10
S1_C2_RUN
BI_11
S2_C2_RUN
BI_12
S2_LLSV
BI_13
S2_MODE_SV
BI_14
LEAD_SYS
BI_15
S1_C3_RUN
BI_16
S2_C3_RUN
BI_17
CH_LIQ_TYPE
BI_18
AMB_MODE
BI_19
RETURN_HOT
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
AI_33
CONTROL_MODE
546
545
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
MODBUS
ADDRESS
AI_32
BACnet
Object/Inst
ance
AI_24
AI_25
AI_26
AI_27
AI_28
AI_29
AI_30
AI_31
NUM_COMPS
S1_OP_CODE
S1_FLT_CODE
S2_OP_CODE
S2_FLT_CODE
S1_DBG_CODE
S1_FAN_STAGE
S2_DBG_CODE
S2_FAN_STAGE
BACnet NAME
Mid Market Native Bacnet_Modbus
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
49
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
ITEM REF
NUM
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
seconds
F°
F°
PSIG
PSIG
PSIG
F°
F°
F°
F°
F°
F°
F°
F°
F°
F°
F°
F°
F°
F°
count
count
count
index
index
index
index
index
count
index
ENG UNITS
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
READ
WRITE
(0=Leaving Water, 1=Return Water, 2=Discharge Air, 3=Suction Press,
Sys 1 Alarm
Sys 2 Alarm
Evaporator Heater Status
Evaporator Pump Status
Sys 1 Comp 1 Run
Sys 2 Comp 1 Run
Sys 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
Sys 1 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP Only)
Sys 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
Bivalent Heat Source (HP Only)
Sys 1 Comp 2 Run
Sys 2 Comp 2 Run
Sys 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
Sys 2 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP Only)
Lead System (0 = Sys 1, 1 = Sys 2)
Sys 1 Comp 3 Run
Sys 2 Comp 3 Run
Chilled Liquid Type (0=Water, 1=Glycol)
Ambient Control Mode (0=Std Amb, 1=Low Amb)
Anti-Recycle Time (Programmed)
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout
Low Ambient Temperature Cutout
Low Suction Pressure Cutout Heating (HP Only)
Low Suction Pressure Cutout (Cooling on HP units )
High Discharge Pressure Cutout
Setpoint
Setpoint 1 (SP Control)
Cooling Range
Cooling Range 1 (SP Control)
Setpoint 2 (SP Control)
Heating Setpoint (HP Only)
Cooling Range 2 (SP Control)
Heating Range (HP Only)
Sys 1 Discharge Temperature (EEV Only)
Sys 1 Discharge Superheat (EEV Only)
Sys 2 Discharge Temperature (EEV Only)
Sys 2 Discharge Superheat (EEV Only)
Leaving Liquid Hot Temp (R-410a)
Return Liquid Hot Temp (R-410a)
4=Cooling, 5=Heating)
Unit Control Mode
Number of Compressors
(See Tablein
A &Table
B) 32)
Sys 1 Operational Code (Definition
(See Tablein
A &Table
B) 32)
Sys 1 Fault Code (Definition
(See Table in
A &Table
B) 32)
Sys 2 Operational Code (Definition
Sys 2 Fault Code (Definition
(See Tablein
A &Table
B) 32)
Sys 1 Debug Code
Sys 1 Condenser Fan Stage
Sys 2 Debug Code
Sys 2 Condenser Fan Stage
POINT DESCRIPTION
Property of JCI/York International. Subject to change without notice
Middle Market IPU II NATIVE BACnet _Modbus Data Maps_ Rev A_06.xls
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
03,04
Type Supported
MODBUS Data
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
Page 2 of 3
6
9
S=Standard; O = Optional; N = Not Available
Point List Code
2/25/2009
10
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Continued from previous page
JOHNSON CONTROLS
Operational Codes
BACnet
Object/Inst
ance
BI_20
BI_21
BI_22
01,02,03
01,02,03
01,02,03
1301
1302
1303
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
ENG UNITS
High Discharge Temperature
Improper Phase Rotation
Low Motor Current / MP / HPCO
Motor Current Unbalanced
Low Differential Oil Pressure
Ground Fault
MP/HPCO Fault
Low Evaporator Temperature
Incorrect Refrigerant Programmed
Power Failure, Manual Reset Required
Unit Motor Current
Low Superheat
Sensor Fault
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
MP/HPCO Inhibit
High Oil Temperature
11
R
R
R
READ
WRITE
Fault Codes
No Fault
VAC Under Voltage
Low Ambient Temperature
High Ambient Temperature
Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp
High Discharge Pressure
High Differential Oil Pressure
Low Suction Pressure
High Motor Current
LLSV Not On
Low Battery Warning
Type Supported
TABLE B
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
MODBUS Data
MODBUS
ADDRESS
POINT DESCRIPTION
Local/Remote Control Mode (0=Local, 1=Remote)
Units (0=Imperial, 1=SI)
Lead/Lag Control Mode (0=Manual, 1=Auto)
`
1
Point List Code
2
3
4
5
6
Property of JCI/York International. Subject to change without notice
Middle Market IPU II NATIVE BACnet _Modbus Data Maps_ Rev A_06.xls
8
Page 3 of 3
7
9
S=Standard; O = Optional; N = Not Available
BACnet Object Types: 0= Analog In, 1 = Analog Out, 2= Analog Value, 3= Binary In, 4 = Binary Output, 5= Binary Value, 8= Device, 15 = Alarm Notification ( 0 -127 are reserved ASHRAE Objects)
WC= Inches of water column; CFM = Cubic Feer per Minute; FPM = Feet per Minute: PSI = Lbs per square inch; Pa = Pascals; kPa = Kilopascals; PPM = Part Per Million; kJ/kg = Kilojoules per Kilogram
See the applicable Middle Market Chiller Operations Manual for more details
The YCWL uses the same firmware as a YCAL , it just ignores Fan Control
The IPU II based YCAL /YCUL Units are configured for Native BACnet MS/TP and Modbus RTU communications. The Microgateway product is not required for these 2 interfaces
Note that these tables of FAULT and OPERATIONAL Codes are for all DX products.
Load Limiting
Compressor(s) Running
Suction Limiting
Discharge Limiting
Anti-Recycle Timer Active
Manual Override
Anti-Coincidence Timer Active
No Abnormal Condition
Unit Switch Off
System Switch Off
Lock-Out
Unit Fault
System Fault
Remote Shutdown
Daily Schedule Shutdown
No Run Permissive
No Cool Load
A
CNTL_MODE
DATA_UNIT
AUTO_LL
BACnet NAME
Mid Market Native Bacnet_Modbus
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE:
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
12
13
11
TABLE
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
94
95
96
ITEM REF
NUM
2/25/2009
10
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
Continued from previous page
197
10
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS
Received Data (Control Data)
Transmitted Data
The unit receives eight data values from the MicroGateway
or E-Link. The first four are analog values and the last four
are digital values. These eight data values are used as control parameters when in REMOTE mode. When the unit is
in LOCAL mode, these eight values are ignored. If the unit
receives no valid YorkTalk 2 transmission for 5 minutes it
will revert back to all local control values. Table 32 “Yorktalk
2 Communications Data Map” lists the control parameters.
These values are found under feature 54 in the MicroGateway
or E-Link.
After receiving a valid transmission from the MicroGateway
or E-Link, the unit will transmit either operational data or history buffer data depending on the “History Buffer Request”
on ENG PAGE 10. Data must be transmitted for every page
under feature 54. If there is no value to be sent to a particular
page, a zero will be sent. Table 32 “Yorktalk 2 Communications Data Map” shows the data values and page listings
for this unit.
198
The latest point map information is
listed on the Johnson Controls Equipment Integration website.
JOHNSON CONTROLS
Ref.
ASCII
PAGE
REF
P0 1
P0 2
P0 3
P0 4
P0 5
P0 6
P0 7
P0 8
P0 9
P1 0
P11
P1 2
P13
P1 4
P15
P1 6
P1 7
P1 8
P1 9
P20
P21
P2 2
P2 3
P24
P2 5
P2 6
P2 7
P28
P2 9
P30
P3 1
P32
P3 3
P3 4
P3 5
P3 6
P3 7
P3 8
P3 9
P4 0
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
JOHNSON CONTROLS
ENG
PAGE
REF
P0 3
P0 4
P0 5
P0 6
P0 7
P0 8
P0 9
P1 0
P1 1
P1 2
P13
P1 4
P15
P1 6
P17
P1 8
P1 9
P2 0
P2 1
P22
P23
P2 4
P2 5
P26
P2 7
P2 8
P2 9
P3 0
P3 1
P32
P3 3
P34
P3 5
P3 6
P3 7
P3 8
P3 9
P4 0
P4 1
P4 2
Date
YORK P N
031-02049-001
031-02049-001
031-02049-001
flash
flash
flash
Checksum
944D
964B
2226
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
Baud
4800
4800
4800
4800
4800
4800
MicroGateway / ELINK
GPIC
Object
T ype
York Talk
Point
T ype
A. Control
A. Control
A. Control
A. Control
D. Control
D. Control
D. Control
D. Control
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
ISN LINC
Descriptive
T ext
8 - 11
12 - 15
16 - 19
20 - 23
24 - 27
28 - 31
32 - 35
36 - 39
40 - 43
44 - 47
48 - 51
52 - 55
56 - 59
60 - 63
64 - 67
68 - 71
72 - 75
76 - 79
80 - 83
84 - 87
88 - 91
92 - 95
96 - 99
1 00 - 103
104 - 107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
York Talk
Character
Position
ADF 1
ADF 2
ADF 3
ADF 4
BD 1
BD 2
BD 3
BD 4
ADF 5
ADF 6
ADF 7
ADF 8
ADF 9
ADF 10
ADF 11
ADF 12
ADF 13
ADF 14
ADF 15
ADF 16
ADF 17
ADF 18
ADF 19
ADF 20
ADF 21
ADF 22
ADF 23
ADF 24
ADF 25
ADF 26
ADF 27
ADF 28
ADF 29
BD 5
BD 6
BD 7
BD 8
BD 9
BD 1 0
BD 1 1
N2
Address
S
S
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Sys 1 EEV Output % (EEV only)
Sys 1 Anti- Recycle Timer
Anti-Coincident Timer
Sys Suction Temp ( EEV only)
Sys 2 Run Time (seconds)
Sys 2 Suction Pressure
Sys 2 Discharge Pressure
Sys 2 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temperature (R-407c systems Only)
Sys 2 Defrost Temperature ( HP only)
Sys 2 Suction Superheat (EEV only)
Sys 2 Anti-Recycle Timer
Sys 2 EEV Output % (EEV only)
Number of Compressors
Sys 1 Alarm
Sys 2 Alarm
Evaporator Heater Status
Evaporator Pump Status
Sys 1 Compressor 1 Run
Sys 2 Compressor 1 Run
Sys 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
O
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
S
S
S
N = NOT AVAILABLE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
S S S S S
S S S S S
O O O O O
O O O O O
S S S S S
History Buffer Request
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp
Return Chilled Liquid Temp
Leaving Hot Liquid Temp (R-410a) Heat Mode Only
Discharge Air Temp ( Cond Unit) Return Hot Liquid Temp (410a- Heat Mod
Leaving Liquid Temp Hot (R-410a)
Ambient Air Temperature
Sys 1 Suction Superheat ( EEV only)
Sys 1 Run Time (seconds)
Sys 1 Suction Pressure
Sys 1 Discharge Pressure
Sys 1 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temperature(R-407c Only)
POINT LIST CODE:
S = STANDARD
O = OPTIONAL
POINT LIST DESCRIPT ION
Setpoint
Load Limit Stage (0, 1, 2)
Heating Setpoint (HP and YCW L HP)
Mode (HP and YCW L HP only) (0=Panel, 1= Cooling, 2 = Heating)
Start/Stop Command
ENG
PAGE
REF
P0 3
P0 4
P0 5
P0 6
P0 7
P08
P09
P1 0
P11
P12
P13
P1 4
P15
P1 6
P17
P1 8
P1 9
P2 0
P2 1
P22
P23
P2 4
P2 5
P26
P2 7
P2 8
P2 9
P3 0
P3 1
P32
P3 3
P34
P3 5
P3 6
P3 7
P3 8
P3 9
P4 0
P4 1
P4 2
Micro Board: 031-02050/02550
COM M ENT S
YCAL Micro Board 031-02050-xxx
YCAL Micro Board 031-02050-xxx
YCAL Micro Board 031-02050-xxx
YCAL Micro Board 031-02550-xxx, IPU 2 board.
YCWL ( water cooled version) Micro Board 031-02550-xxx, IPU 2 board.
Micro Board 031-02550-xxx . Fix native Modbus communications (SCR . Fix Café Metric functionality (SCR-766)
York Talk 2
Use ASCII page column for interfaces utilizing an ASCII XL Translator or MicroGateway to communicate to a chiller LINC
Version
C.MMC.03.02
C.MMC.03.01
C.MMC.03.00
C.MMC.13.xx
C.MMC.13.xx
C.MMC.13.02
YCAL/YCWL/YLAA Middle Market w/ 2050, 2550
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
TABLE 32 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP
10
Continued on next page
199
ENG
PAGE
REF
P43
P4 4
P4 5
P4 6
P4 7
P4 8
P4 9
P5 0
P5 1
P5 2
P5 3
P5 4
P5 5
P5 6
P5 7
P5 8
P5 9
P60
P6 1
P62
P6 3
P64
P65
P6 6
P6 7
P6 8
P6 9
P7 0
P7 1
P7 2
P7 3
P7 4
P7 5
P76
P77
P78
P79
P80
P81
P82
P83
P84
ASCII
PAGE
REF
P41
P4 2
P4 3
P4 4
P4 5
P4 6
P4 7
P4 8
P4 9
P5 0
P5 1
P5 2
P5 3
P5 4
P5 5
P5 6
P5 7
P58
P5 9
P60
P6 1
P62
P63
P6 4
P6 5
P6 6
P6 7
P6 8
P6 9
P7 0
P7 1
P7 2
P7 3
P74
P75
P76
P77
P78
P79
P80
P81
P82
GPIC
Object
T ype
York Talk
Point
T ype
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
Code Monitor
Code Monitor
Code Monitor
Code Monitor
Code Monitor
Code Monitor
Code Monitor
Code Monitor
Code Monitor
Code Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
A. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
D. Monitor
ISN LINC
Descriptive
T ext
York Talk
Character
Position
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138 - 141
142 - 145
146 - 149
150 - 153
154 - 157
158 - 161
162 - 165
166 - 169
170 - 173
174 - 177
178 - 181
182 - 185
186 - 189
190 - 193
194
195
196
197
198
200
BD 12
BD 1 3
BD 1 4
BD 1 5
BD 1 6
BD 1 7
BD 1 8
BD 1 9
BD 2 0
BD 2 1
BD 2 2
BD 2 3
BD 2 4
ADI 1
ADI 2
ADI 3
ADI 4
ADI 5
ADI 6
ADI 7
ADI 8
ADI 9
ADI 10
ADF 30
ADF 31
ADF 32
ADF 33
ADF 34
ADF 35
ADF 36
ADF 37
ADF 38
ADF 39
ADF 40
ADF 41
ADF 42
ADF 43
BD 25
BD 26
BD 27
BD 28
BD 29
N2
Address
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
O
O
O
O
O
ENG
PAGE
REF
P43
P4 4
P4 5
P4 6
P4 7
P4 8
P4 9
P50
P5 1
P5 2
P5 3
P5 4
P5 5
P5 6
P5 7
P5 8
P5 9
P60
P6 1
P62
P6 3
P64
P65
P6 6
P67
P6 8
P6 9
P7 0
P7 1
P7 2
P7 3
P7 4
P7 5
P76
P77
P78
P79
P80
P81
P82
P83
P84
Continued from previous page
NOTE: The Appropriate Product Code Listing Summary Should Accompany Document
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
O
O
O
O
O
N = NOT AVAILABLE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S N
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S
Unit Control Mode (0=Lv W tr, 1=Ret W tr, 2=Dis Air, 3=SP, 4=Cool, 5=Heat) S
Anti-Recycle Time (Programmed)
S
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout
S
Low Ambient Temperature Cutout
S
Low Suction Pressure Cutout (Heating HP Only)
S
Low Suction Pressure Cutout (Cooling HP only)
S
High Discharge Pressure Cutout
S
Setpoint (local)
S
Cooling Range
S
Setpoint 2 ( SP Control), Heating Setpoint ( HP and YCW L HP only)
O
Cool Range Setpoint 2 (SP Control), Heat Range (HP and YCW L HP only) O
Sys 1 Discharge Temp (EEV only)
O
Sys 1 Discharge Superheat (EEV only)
O
Sys 2 Discharge Temp (EEV only)
O
Sys 2 Discharge Superheat (EEV only)
O
Sys 2 Condenser Fan Stage
Sys 1 Condenser Fan Stage
POINT LIST CODE:
S = STANDARD
O = OPTIONAL
POINT LIST DESCRIPT ION
Sys 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
Sys 1 Compressor 2 Run
Sys 2 Compressor 2 Run
Sys 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
Lead System (0 = Sys 1, 1 = Sys 2)
Sys 1 Compressor 3 Run
Sys 2 Compressor 3 Run
Chilled Liquid Type (0=W ater, 1=Glycol)
Ambient Control Mode (0=Std Amb, 1=Low Amb)
Local/Remote Control Mode (0=Local, 1=Remote)
Units (0=Imperial, 1=SI)
Lead/Lag Control Mode (0=Manual, 1=Auto)
Sys 2 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
*Sys 1 Operational Code
*Sys 1 Fault Code
*Sys 2 Operational Code
*Sys 2 Fault Code
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Continued on next page
JOHNSON CONTROLS
ENG
PAGE
P56
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
ASCII
PAGE
P54
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
C_OPER.CODE
No Abnormal Condition
Unit Switch Off
System Switch Off
Lock-Out
Unit Fault
System Fault
Remote Shutdown
Daily Schedule Shutdown
No Run Permissive
No Cool Load
Anti-Coincidence Timer Active
Anti-Recycle Timer Active
Manual Override
Suction Limiting
Discharge Limiting
n /a
Load Limiting
Compressor(s) Running
Heat Pump Load Limiting ( HP Only)
Operational Code
ENG
PAGE
P57
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
ASCII
PAGE
P55
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
C_FAULT .CODE
No Fault Code
n /a
Low Ambient Temperature
n /a
Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
High Discharge Pressure
n /a
Low Suction Pressure
n /a
n /a
n /a
n /a
n /a
n /a
n /a
n /a
n /a
n /a
MP / HPCO Fault
Low Evaporator Temperature
n/a
n/a
Unit Motor Current
Low Superheat
Sensor Fault
Discharge Inhibit
MP/HPCO Inhibit
Pump Trip
Pump Fail Make Flow
Fault Code
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
JOHNSON CONTROLS
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
Continued from previous page
10
201
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION
CONVERSION CHART
CHART
TEMPERATURE
Temperature Conversion Chart Actual Temperatures
°F
0
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
64
68
72
76
80
84
88
92
96
100
104
108
112
116
120
124
128
132
136
140
144
148
152
156
160
164
168
172
176
180
184
188
192
196
200
204
208
212
216
220
224
228
232
236
240
244
202
=
°C
-17.8
-15.6
-13.3
-11.1
-8.9
-6.7
-4.4
-2.2
0.0
2.2
4.4
6.7
8.9
11.1
13.3
15.6
17.8
20.0
22.2
24.4
26.7
28.9
31.1
33.3
35.6
37.8
40.0
42.2
44.4
46.7
48.9
51.1
53.3
55.6
57.8
60.0
62.2
64.4
66.7
68.9
71.1
73.3
75.6
77.8
80.0
82.2
84.4
86.7
88.9
91.1
93.3
95.6
97.8
100.0
102.2
104.4
106.7
108.9
111.1
113.3
115.6
117.8
°C
-18
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
100
102
104
=
Temperature Conversion Chart Differential Temperatures
°F
-0.4
3.2
6.8
10.4
14
17.6
21.2
24.8
28.4
32
35.6
39.2
42.8
46.4
50
53.6
57.2
60.8
64.4
68
71.6
75.2
78.8
82.4
86
89.6
93.2
96.8
100.4
104
107.6
111.2
114.8
118.4
122
125.6
129.2
132.8
136.4
140
143.6
147.2
150.8
154.4
158
161.6
165.2
168.8
172.4
176
179.6
183.2
186.8
190.4
194
197.6
201.2
204.8
208.4
212
215.6
219.2
°F
0
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
=
°C
0
2.2
4.4
6.7
8.9
11.1
13.3
15.6
17.8
20
22.2
24.4
26.7
28.9
31.1
33.3
°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
=
°F
0
3.6
7.2
10.8
14.4
18
21.6
25.2
28.8
32.4
36
39.6
43.2
46.8
50.4
54
=
PSI
21.8
29
36.3
43.5
50.8
58
65.3
72.5
79.8
87
94.3
101.5
108.8
116
123.3
130.5
137.8
145
152.3
159.5
166.8
174
181.3
188.5
195.8
203
210.3
217.5
224.8
232
239.3
246.5
253.8
261
268.3
275.5
282.8
290
297.3
Pressure Conversion Chart Gauge or Differential
PSI
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
=
BAR
1.38
2.07
2.76
3.45
4.14
4.83
5.52
6.21
6.9
7.59
8.28
8.97
9.66
10.34
11.03
11.72
12.41
13.1
13.79
14.48
15.17
15.86
16.55
17.24
17.93
18.62
19.31
20
20.69
21.38
22.07
22.76
23.45
24.14
24.83
25.52
26.21
26.9
27.59
BAR
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
7.5
8
8.5
9
9.5
10
10.5
11
11.5
12
12.5
13
13.5
14
14.5
15
15.5
16
16.5
17
17.5
18
18.5
19
19.5
20
20.5
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
R410A
PRESSURE TEMPERATURE CHART
JOHNSON CONTROLS
PSIG
TEMP ˚F
PSIG
TEMP ˚F
0
-60
78
20
2
-58
80
21
4
-54
85
24
6
-50
90
26
8
-46
95
29
10
-42
100
32
12
-39
105
34
14
-36
110
36
16
-33
115
39
18
-30
120
41
20
-28
125
43
22
-26
130
45
24
-24
135
47
26
-20
140
49
28
-18
145
51
30
-16
150
53
32
-14
160
57
34
-12
170
60
36
-10
180
64
38
-8
190
67
40
-6
200
70
42
-4
210
73
44
-3
220
76
46
-2
225
78
48
0
235
80
50
1
245
83
52
3
255
85
54
4
265
88
56
6
275
90
58
7
285
92
60
8
295
95
62
10
305
97
64
11
325
101
66
13
355
108
68
14
375
112
70
15
405
118
72
16
500
134
74
17
600
149
76
19
700
159
10
203
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
NOTES
204
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
The following factors can be used to convert from
English to the most common SI Metric values.
Table 1 - SI METRIC CONVERSION
MEASUREMENT
MULTIPLY ENGLISH UNIT
BY FACTOR
TO OBTAIN METRIC UNIT
Capacity
Tons Refrigerant Effect (ton)
3.516
Kilowatts (kW)
Power
Horsepower
0.7457
Kilowatts (kW)
Flow Rate
Gallons / Minute (gpm)
0.0631
Liters / Second (l/s)
Feet (ft)
304.8
Meters (m)
Inches (in)
25.4
Millimeters (mm)
Weight
Pounds (lbs)
0.4538
Kilograms (kg)
Velocity
Feet / Second (fps)
0.3048
Meters / Second (m/s)
Feet of Water (ft)
2.989
Kilopascals (kPa)
Pounds / Square Inch (psi)
6.895
Kilopascals (kPa)
Length
Pressure Drop
TEMPERATURE
To convert degrees Fahrenheit (°F) to degrees Celsius
(°C), subtract 32° and multiply by 5/9 or 0.5556.
Example: (45.0°F - 32°) x 0.5556 = 27.2°C
To convert a temperature range (i.e., a range of 10°F)
from Fahrenheit to Celsius, multiply by 5/9 or 0.5556.
Example: 10.0°F range x 0.5556 = 5.6 °C range
JOHNSON CONTROLS
205
P.O. Box 1592, York, Pennsylvania USA 17405-1592
Copyright © by Johnson Controls 2011
Form 150.72-NM3 (811)
Issue Date: August 15, 2011
Supersedes 150.72-NM3 (909)
Tele. 800-861-1001
www.johnsoncontrols.com
Subject to change without notice. Printed in USA
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement